Yamaha 1100 Service manual

EB000000
XVS1100 (L)
SERVICE MANUAL
1998 by Yamaha Motor Co.,Ltd.
First edition, October 1998
All rights reserved. Any reproduction or
unauthorized use without the written
permission of Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.
is expressly prohibited.
EB001000
NOTICE
This manual was produced by the Yamaha Motor Company primarily for use by Yamaha dealers and
their qualified mechanics. It is not possible to include all the knowledge of a mechanic in one manual,
so it is assumed that anyone who uses this book to perform maintenance and repairs on Yamaha motorcycles has a basic understanding of the mechanical ideas and the procedures of motorcycle repair.
Repairs attempted by anyone without this knowledge are likely to render the motorcycle unsafe and
unfit for use.
Yamaha Motor Company, Ltd.is continually striving to improve all its models. Modifications and significant changes in specifications or procedures will be forwarded to all authorized Yamaha dealers and
will appear in future editions of this manual where applicable.
NOTE:
Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Particularly important information is distinguished in this manual by the following notations.
The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR
SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death to
the motorcycle operator, a bystander or a person inspecting or repairing the
motorcycle.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid damage
to the motorcycle.
A NOTE provides key information to make procedures easier or clearer.
EB002000
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
This manual consists of chapters for the main categories of subjects. (See “Illustrated symbols”)
1st title 1 :
This is the title of the chapter with its symbol in the upper right corner of each page.
2nd title 2 : This title indicates the section of the chapter and only appears on the first page of each
section. It is located in the upper right corner of the page.
3rd title 3 : This title indicates a sub-section that is followed by step-by-step procedures accompanied by corresponding illustrations.
EXPLODED DIAGRAMS
To help identify parts and clarify procedure steps, there are exploded diagrams at the start of each removal and disassembly section.
1. An easy-to-see exploded diagram 4 is provided for removal and disassembly jobs.
2. Numbers 5 are given in the order of the jobs in the exploded diagram. A number that is enclosed by
a circle indicates a disassembly step.
3. An explanation of jobs and notes is presented in an easy-to-read way by the use of symbol marks
6 . The meanings of the symbol marks are given on the next page.
4. A job instruction chart 7 accompanies the exploded diagram, providing the order of jobs, names of
parts, notes in jobs, etc.
5. For jobs requiring more information, the step-by-step format supplements 8 are given in addition to
the exploded diagram and the job instruction chart.
2
1
6
3
8
5
4
7
EB003000
1
ILLUSTRATED SYMBOLS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Illustrated symbols 1 to 9 are printed on the
top right of each page and indicate the subject of
each chapter.
1 General information
2 Specifications
3 Periodic inspections and adjustments
4 Engine
5 Cooling system
6 Carburetion
7 Chassis
8 Electrical
9 Troubleshooting
Illustrated symbols 10 to 17 are used to identify
the specifications appearing in the text.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
22
23
25
Can be serviced with engine mounted
Filling fluid
Lubricant
Special tool
Torque
Wear limit, clearance
Engine speed
Ω, V, A
Illustrated symbols 18 to 23 in the exploded diagrams indicate the types of lubricants and lubrication points.
18
19
20
21
22
23
Apply engine oil
Apply gear oil
Apply molybdenum disulfide oil
Apply wheel bearing grease
Apply lightweight lithium-soap base grease
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease
Illustrated symbols 24 to 25 in the exploded diagrams indicate where to apply locking agent 24
and when to install new parts 25 .
24 Apply locking agent (LOCTITE)
25 Replace
E004000
CHAPTER TITLES
GENERAL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
PERIODIC INSPECTION AND
ADJUSTMENTS
ENGINE OVERHAUL
CARBURETION
CHASSIS
ELECTRICAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
GEN
INFO
1
SPEC
2
INSP
ADJ
3
ENG
4
CARB
5
CHAS
6
ELEC
7
TRBL
SHTG
8
GEN
INFO
1
GEN
INFO
CHAPTER 1.
GENERAL INFORMATION
MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
MODEL LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCLIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
CHECKING OF CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION
GEN
INFO
EB100000
GENERAL INFORMATION
MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION
EB100010
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number 1 is stamped
into the right side of the steering head.
MODEL LABEL
The model label 1 is affixed to the frame. This
information will be needed to order spare parts.
1-1
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
GEN
INFO
EB101000
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL PROCEDURES
1. Remove all dirt, mud, dust and foreign material before removal and disassembly.
2. Use proper tools and cleaning equipment.
Refer to the “SPECIAL TOOLS” section.
3. When disassembling the machine, always
keep mated parts together. This includes
gears, cylinders, pistons and other parts that
have been “mated” through normal wear.
Mated parts must always be reused or replaced as an assembly.
4. During machine disassembly, clean all parts
and place them in trays in the order of disassembly. This will speed up assembly and allow for the correct installation of all parts.
5. Keep all parts away from any source of fire.
EB101010
REPLACEMENT PARTS
1. Use only genuine Yamaha parts for all replacements. Use oil and grease recommended by Yamaha for all lubrication jobs.
Other brands may be similar in function and
appearance, but inferior in quality.
EB101020
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS
1. Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings when
overhauling the engine. All gasket surfaces,
oil seal lips and O-rings must be cleaned.
2. Properly oil all mating parts and bearings
during reassembly. Apply grease to the oil
seal lips.
1-2
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
GEN
INFO
EB101030
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER
PINS
1. Replace all lock washers/plates 1 and cotter pins after removal. Bend lock tabs along
the bolt or nut flats after the bolt or nut has
been tightened to specification.
EB101040
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS
1. Install bearings and oil seals so that the
manufacturer’s marks or numbers are visible. When installing oil seals, apply a light
coating of lightweight lithium base grease to
the seal lips. Oil bearings liberally when
installing, if appropriate.
1 Oil seal
CAUTION:
Do not use compressed air to spin the bearings dry. This will damage the bearing surfaces.
1 Bearing
EB101050
CIRCLIPS
1. Check all circlips carefully before reassembly. Always replace piston pin clips after one
use. Replace distorted circlips. When installing a circlip 1 , make sure that the sharpedged corner 2 is positioned opposite the
thrust 3 it receives. See sectional view.
4 Shaft
1-3
CHECKING OF CONNECTIONS
GEN
INFO
EB801000
CHECKING OF CONNECTIONS
Check the connectors for stains, rust, moisture,
etc.
1. Disconnect:
Connector
2. Check:
Connector
Moisture Dry each terminal with an air
blower.
Stains/rust Connect and disconnect the
terminals several times.
3. Check:
Connector leads
Looseness Bend up the pin 1 and connect the terminals.
4. Connect:
Connector terminals
NOTE:
The two terminals “click” together.
5. Check:
Continuity (using a pocket tester)
NOTE:
If there is no continuity, clean the terminals.
When checking the wire harness be sure to
perform steps 1 to 3.
As a quick remedy, use a contact revitalizer
available at most part stores.
Check the connector with a pocket tester as
shown.
1-4
SPECIAL TOOLS
GEN
INFO
EB102001
SPECIAL TOOLS
The following special tools are necessary for complete and accurate tune-up and assembly. Use only
the appropriate special tools; this will help prevent damage caused by the use of inappropriate tools or
improvised techniques. Special tools may differ by shape and part number from country to country. In
such a case, two types are provided.
When placing an order, refer to the list provided below to avoid any mistakes.
Tool No.
Weight
90890-01084
Bolt
90890-01085
Tool name/How to use
Slide hammer bolt/weight
These tools are used to remove the rocker
arm shaft.
Crankcase separating tool
90890-01135
This tool is used to remove the crankshaft.
Coupling gear/Middle shaft tool
90890-01229
This tool is needed when removing or
installing the final pinion shaft nut.
Final gear
backlash band
90890-01230
Middle gear
backlash band
90890-01231
Final gear backlash band
This tool is needed when measuring final gear
/middle gear backlash.
Crankshaft installer pot/bolt/adapter/spacer
Installer pot
90890-01274
Bolt
90890-01275
90890
01275
Adaptor
90890-04130
Spacer
90890-04060
These tools are used to install the crankshaft.
Piston pin puller
90890-01304
This tool is used to remove the piston pin.
Fuel level gauge
90890-01312
This gauge is used to measure the fuel level
in the float chamber.
1-5
Illustration
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No.
T-handle
90890-01326
Holder
90890-01460
Puller
90890-01362
Adapter
90890-04131
Weight
90890-01367
Adapter
90890-01381
Tool name/How to use
T-handle/damper rod holder
These tools are needed to loosen and tighten
the damper rod holding bolt.
Flywheel puller/adapter
These tools are needed to remove the rotor.
Fork seal driver weight/adapter
These tools are needed when installing the
slide metal, oil seal and dust seal into the fork.
Ring nut wrench/ehaust and steering nut
Ring nut wrench
wrench
90890-01403
Exhaust nut
wrench
This tool is needed to loosen and tighten the
90890-01268
steering stem ring nut.
Sheave holder
90890-01701
This tool is needed to hold the rotor when removing or installing the rotor bolt.
Compression gauge set
90890-03081
These tools are needed to measure engine
compression.
Vacuum gauge
90890-03094
This gauge is needed for carburetor synchronization.
Pocket tester
90890-03112
This instrument is needed for checking the
electrical system.
Engine tachometer
90890-03113
This tool is needed for observing engine r/min.
1-6
GEN
INFO
Illustration
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No.
Tool name/How to use
Timing light
90890-03141
This tool is necessary for checking ignition
timing.
Valve guide remover & installer
90890-04014
This tool is needed to remove and install the
valve guide.
Valve spring compressor
90890-04019
This tool is needed to remove and install the
valve assemblies.
Adapter
90890-01277
Shock puller
90890-01290
Weight
90890-01291
Crankshaft installer bolt adapter/armature
shock puller/weight
These tools are needed when removing the
final pinion shaft.
Bearing retainer wrench
90890-04137
This tool is needed when removing or installing the middle drive shaft assembly.
Wrench
90890-04138
Holder
90890-04055
Middle drive shaft nut wrench/Middle drive
shaft holder
These tools are needed when removing or
installing the middle drive shaft bearing.
Universal joint holder
90890-04062
This tool is needed when removing or installing the driven pinion gear nut.
Bearing retainer wrench
90890-04077
This tool is needed when removing or installing the final drive pinion gear assembly.
Clutch holding tool
90890-04086
This tool is needed to hold the clutch when removing or installing the clutch boss nut.
1-7
GEN
INFO
Illustration
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No.
Tool name/How to use
Damper spring compressor
90890-04090
This tool is needed when removing or installing the damper spring.
Dynamic spark tester
Ignition checker
90890-06754
This instrument is necessary for checking the
ignition system components.
Yamaha bond No.1215
90890-85505
This sealant (bond) is used on crankcase mating surfaces, etc.
1-8
GEN
INFO
Illustration
SPEC
2
E
SPEC
CHAPTER 2.
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
2-4
2-14
2-18
GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
CONVERSION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
CABLE ROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Standard
Model code:
XVS1100: 5EL1 (For Europe)
5EL2 (For D, A, FIN)
5EL3 (For Australia)
Dimensions:
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Seat height
Wheelbase
Minimum ground clearance
Minimum turning radius
2,405 mm
895 mm
1,095 mm
690 mm
1,640 mm
145 mm
3,200 mm
Basic weight:
With oil and a full fuel tank
274 kg (5EL2 : 275kg)
Engine:
Engine type
Cylinder arrangement
Displacement
Bore stroke
Compression ratio
Compression pressure (STD)
Starting system
Air cooled 4-stroke, SOHC
V-type 2-cylinder
1.063 L
95 75mm
8.3 : 1
1,000 kPa (10 kg/cm2, 10 bar) at 400 r/min
Electric starter
Lubrication system:
Wet sump
Oil type or grade:
Engine oil
Temp.
C
API standard:
“SE” or higher grade
ACEA standard:
G4 or G5
Final gear oil:
SAE80API “GL-4” Hypoid Gear Oil
Oil quantity:
Engine oil
Periodic oil change
With oil filter replacement
Total amount
Final gear case oil
Total amount
3.0 L
3.1 L
3.6 L
Air filter:
Dry type element
Fuel:
Type
Fuel tank capacity
Fuel reserve amount
Regular unleaded gasoline
17 L
4.5 L
0.2 L
2-1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
SPEC
Standard
Carburetor:
Type/quantity
Manufacturer
BSR37/2
MIKUNI
Spark plug:
Type
Manufacturer
Spark plug gap
BPR7ES/W22EPR–U
NGK/DENSO
0.7 X 0.8 mm
Clutch type:
Wet, multiple-disc
Transmission:
Primary reduction system
Primary reduction ratio
Secondary reduction system
Secondary reduction ratio
Transmission type
Operation
Gear ratio
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Spur gear
78/47 (1.660)
Shaft drive
44/47
19/18
32/11 (2.875)
Constant mesh 5-speed
Left foot operation
40/17 (2.353)
40/24 (1.667)
36/28 (1.286)
32/31 (1.032)
29/34 (0.853)
Chassis:
Frame type
Caster angle
Trail
Double cradle
33
136 mm
Tire:
Type
Size
Manufacturer
Type
front
rear
front
rear
front
rear
Maximum load-except motorcycle:
Tire pressure (cold tire):
0 X 90 kg (0 X 198 lb) load *
front
rear
90 kg (198 lb) X Maximum load *
front
rear
Brake:
Front brake
Rear brake
type
operation
type
operation
With tube
110/90-18 61S
170/80-15M/C 77S
BRIDGESTONE/DUNLOP
BRIDGESTONE/DUNLOP
EXEDRA L309/K555F
EXEDRA G546/K555
201 kg (5EL2 : 200kg)
200 kPa (2.00 kg/cm2)
225 kPa (2.25 kg/cm2)
225 kPa (2.25 kg/cm2)
250 kPa (2.50 kg/cm2)
* Load is the total weight of the cargo, rider,
passenger and accessories.
Dual disc brake
Right hand operation
Single disc brake
Right foot operation
2-2
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Standard
Suspension:
Front suspension
Rear suspension
Telescopic fork
Swingarm (link suspension)
Shock absorber:
Front shock absorber
Rear shock absorber
Coil spring/Oil damper
Coil spring/Gas-oil damper
Wheel travel:
Front wheel travel
Rear wheel travel
140 mm
113 mm
Electrical:
Ignition system
Generator system
Battery type
Battery capacity
T.C.I. (digital)
A.C. magneto
GT14B-4
12 V 12 AH
Headlight type:
Quartz bulb (halogen)
Bulb wattage quantity:
Headlight
Auxiliary light
Tail/brake light
Turn signal
Licence light
Meter light
Neutral indicator light
High beam indicator light
Turn indicator light
Oil level caution light
Engine warning light
12 V 60 W/55 W 1
12 V 4 W 1
12 V 5 W/21 W 1
12 V 21 W 4
12 V 5 W 1
14 V 1.4 W 2
12 V 1.7 W 1
12 V 1.7 W 1
12 V 1.7 W 1
12 V 1.7 W 1
12 V 1.7 W 1
2-3
SPEC
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Item
Standard
Limit
Cylinder head:
Warp limit
SSS
0.03 mm
Cylinder:
Bore size
Measuring point
95.00 X 95.01 mm
40 mm
95.1 mm
SSS
Chain drive (left & right)
25.000 X 25.021 mm
24.96 X 24.98 mm
0.020 X 0.061 mm
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
39.112 X 39.212 mm
#1: 32.093 X 32.193 mm
#2: 32.127 X 32.227 mm
7.162 mm
39.145 X 39.245 mm
32.200 X 32.300 mm
7.195 mm
SSS
39.012 mm
#1: 31.993 mm
#2: 32.027 mm
7.012 mm
39.045 mm
32.100 mm
7.045 mm
0.03 mm
Camshaft:
Drive method
Cam cap inside diameter
Camshaft outside diameter
Shaft-to-cap clearance
Cam dimensions
Intake
Exhaust
Camshaft runout limit
“A”
“B”
“C”
“A”
“B”
“C”
2-4
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
SPEC
Standard
Limit
Timing chain:
Timing chain type/No. of links
Timing chain adjustment method
SILENT CHAIN/98L
Automatic
SSS
SSS
Rocker arm/rocker arm shaft:
Bearing inside diameter
Shaft outside diameter
Arm-to-shaft clearance
14.000 mm X 14.018 mm
13.985 mm X 13.991 mm
0.009 mm X 0.033 mm
14.036 mm
13.95 mm
0.086 mm
Valve, valve seat, valve guide:
Valve clearance (cold)
IN
EX
0.07 X 0.12 mm
0.12 X 0.17 mm
SSS
SSS
Valve dimensions:
Head Dia
“A” head diameter
“B” face width
“C” seat width
“D” margin thickness
Stem outside diameter
Guide inside diameter
Stem-to-guide clearance
Face width
IN
EX
IN
EX
IN
EX
IN
EX
IN
EX
IN
EX
IN
EX
Seat Width
47.0 X 47.2 mm
39.0 X 39.2 mm
2.1 mm
2.1 mm
1.2 X 1.4 mm
1.2 X 1.4 mm
1.1 X 1.5 mm
1.1 X 1.5 mm
7.975 X 7.990 mm
7.960 X 7.975 mm
8.000 X 8.012 mm
8.000 X 8.012 mm
0.010 X 0.037 mm
0.025 X 0.052 mm
2-5
Margin Thickness
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
1.8 mm
1.8 mm
0.8 mm
0.8 mm
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
0.08 mm
0.10 mm
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Standard
Valve spring:
Free length
Set length (valve closed)
Compressed pressure
(installed)
Tilt limit
Direction of winding
(top view)
Piston:
Piston to cylinder clearance
Piston size “D”
Measuring point “H”
Piston off-set
Limit
SSS
0.03 mm
IN
EX
1.2 X 1.4 mm
1.2 X 1.4 mm
2.0 mm
2.0 mm
IN
EX
IN
EX
IN
EX
IN
EX
44.6 mm
44.6 mm
40 mm
40 mm
160.7 N (16.4 kg)
160.7 N (16.4 kg)
SSS
SSS
43.5 mm
43.5 mm
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
2.5_/1.9mm
2.5_/1.9mm
IN
EX
Clockwise
Clockwise
SSS
SSS
0.025 X 0.050 mm
94.960 X 94.975 mm
0.15 mm
SSS
5 mm
0 mm
SSS
SSS
Stem runout limit
Valve seat width
SPEC
2-6
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Piston pin bore inside diameter
Piston pin outside diameter
SPEC
Standard
Limit
22.004 X 22.015 mm
21.991 X 22.000 mm
SSS
SSS
Plain
1.5
3.8 mm
0.3 X 0.5 mm
0.04 X 0.08 mm
SSS
SSS
0.8 mm
0.1 mm
Taper
1.2
3.8 mm
0.30 X 0.45 mm
0.03 X 0.07 mm
SSS
SSS
0.8 mm
0.1 mm
2.5
3.4 mm
0.2 X 0.7 mm
SSS
SSS
Piston rings:
Top ring:
Type
Dimensions (B
T)
End gap (installed)
Side clearance (installed)
2nd ring:
Type
Dimensions (B
T)
End gap (installed)
Side clearance
Oil ring:
Dimensions (B
T)
End gap (installed)
Connecting rod:
Oil clearance
Color code (corresponding size)
0.044 X 0.073 mm
SSS
1 Blue 2 Black 3 Brown 4 Green 5 Yellow SSS
Crankshaft:
Crank width “A”
Runout limit “C”
Big end side clearance “D”
101.95 X 102.00 mm
SSS
0.320 X 0.474 mm
2-7
SSS
0.02 mm
SSS
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
SPEC
Standard
Limit
Clutch:
Friction plate thickness
Quantity
Clutch plate thickness
Quantity
Clutch plate thickness
Quantity
Clutch spring free length
Quantity
Clutch housing thrust clearance
Clutch housing radial clearance
Clutch release method
Push rod bending limit
2.9 X 3.1 mm
8
2.5 X 2.7 mm
1
1.9 X 2.1 mm
7
7.2 mm
1
0.05 X 0.40 mm
0.010 X 0.044 mm
Inner push, screw push
SSS
2.8 mm
SSS
0.1 mm
SSS
0.1 mm
Transmission:
Main axle deflection limit
Drive axle deflection limit
SSS
SSS
0.08 mm
0.08 mm
Shifter:
Shifter type
Guide bar
SSS
5EL1 00
#1: #110, #2: #112.5
#55
#1: 5DL39-53-3/5, #2: 5DL40-53-3/5
P-0M
#63.8
#145
1.0
#17.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
3
1.2
#42.5
0.8
#125
4X5 mm
950 X 1,050 r/min
34.7 X 37.3 kPa (260 X 280 mmHg)
75 X 85_C
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
Electrical type
UC-Z6M/MITSUBISHI
0.8 A
12 kPa (0.12 kg/cm2)
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
Carburetor:
I. D. mark
Main jet
Main air jet
Jet needle
Needle jet
Pilot air jet
Pilot outlet
Pilot jet
Bypass 1
Bypass 2
Bypass 3
Pilot screw
Valve seat size
Starter jet
Starter jet
Throttle valve size
Fuel level
Engine idle speed
Intake vacuum
Engine oil temperature
Fuel pump:
Type
Model/manufacturer
Consumption amperage
Output pressure
(M.J)
(M.A.J)
(J.N)
(N.J)
(P.A.J.1)
(P.A.J.2)
(P.O)
(P.J)
(B.P.1)
(B.P.2)
(B.P.3)
(P.S)
(V.S)
(G.S.1)
(G.S.2)
(Th.V)
(F.L)
<max>
2-8
6.5 mm
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
0.5 mm
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
SPEC
Standard
Limit
Lubrication system:
Oil filter type
Oil pump type
Tip clearance “A” or “B”
Side clearance
Relief valve operating pressure
Paper type
Trochoid type
0.03 X 0.09 mm
0.03 X 0.08 mm
450 X 550 kPa (4.5 X 5.5 kg/cm2)
SSS
SSS
0.15 mm
0.15 mm
SSS
Shaft drive:
Middle gear backlash
Final gear backlash
0.1 X 0.2 mm
0.1 X 0.2 mm
SSS
SSS
2-9
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Standard
Lubrication chart:
2-10
SPEC
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Cylinder head tightening sequence:
Crankcase tightening sequence:
Left crankcase
Right crankcase
2-11
SPEC
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC
Tightening torques
Part to be tightened
g
Cylinder head
Cylinder head
Plate
Cylinder head cover
Cylinder head (exhaust pipe)
Rocker arm shaft
Camshaft sprocket cover
Tappet cover
Rocker arm shaft (oil passage)
Stopper plate (camshaft)
Spark plug
Cylinder
Lower cylinder head cover
Upper cylinder head cover
Connecting rod
Rotor
Valve adjusting locknut
Camshaft sprocket
Timing chain tensioner
Timing chain tentioner cap
Timing chain guide
Oil pump
Oil strainer cover
Oil filter cover
Oil pump gear
Oil pump cap
Oil deliuery pipe (cylinder head)
(crankcase)
Drain bolt
Carburetor cover
Air filter case stay
Air filter case assembly
Exhaust pipe joint and cylinder head
Exhaust pipe joint and muffler
assembly
Muffler
Crankcase (cylinder)
Crankcase (cylinder)
Crankcase
Crankcase
Bearing retainer (middle drive pinion
gear)
Crankcase cover (left)
Crankcase cover (right)
Clamp
One-way clutch
Primary drive gear
Thread
size
Q’ty
y
Nut
Nut
Bolt
Screw
Stud bolt
Union bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
—
Bolt
Bolt
Screw
Nut
Nut
Nut
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Union bolt
Union bolt
—
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Nut
Bolt
M12
M10
M8
M6
M8
M16
M6
M6
M16
M8
M14
M6
M6
M6
M9
M16
M8
M10
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M16
M10
M14
M5
M6
M5
M8
M8
Bolt
Stud bolt
Stud bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Nut
Part name
2-12
Tightening
torque
Nm
mSkg
8
2
2
4
4
2
4
8
4
4
2
2
6
8
4
1
4
2
4
2
4
3
3
5
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
3
4
2
50
35
20
4
12.5
37.5
10
10
38
20
20
10
10
5
48
175
27
55
10
8
10
10
10
10
12
10
20
20
43
7
10
2
20
20
5.0
3.5
2.0
0.4
1.25
3.75
1.0
1.0
3.8
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
4.8
17.5
2.7
5.5
1.0
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.0
2.0
2.0
4.3
0.7
1.0
0.2
2.0
2.0
M10
M12
M10
M10
M6
M8
2
8
2
3
10
3
25
24
20
38.5
10
25
2.5
2.4
2.0
3.85
1.0
2.5
M6
M6
M6
M6
M20
13
11
1
8
1
10
10
10
12
110
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
11.0
Remarks
Use lock washer
Use lock washer
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Part to be tightened
g
Clutch spring
Clutch adjuster
Clutch boss
Push lever axle
Middle drive pinion gear
Bearing retainer (middle driven shaft)
Yoke (middle driven shaft)
Bearing housing (middle drive shaft)
Shift lever stopper
Part name
Bolt
Nut
Nut
Screw
Nut
Nut
Nut
Bolt
Bolt
Thread
size
Q’ty
y
M6
M8
M20
M8
M44
M88
M14
M8
M8
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
SPEC
Tightening
torque
Nm
mSkg
8
12
70
12
110
110
—
25
22
0.8
1.2
7.0
1.2
11.0
11.0
—
2.5
2.2
Remarks
Use lock washer
Stake
Stake
Stake
Use lock washer
Guide bar stopper
Shift dram segment
Shift arm
Shift pedal adjuster
Screw
Screw
Bolt
Nut
M6
M5
M6
M6
2
1
1
2
7
4
10
10
0.7
0.4
1.0
1.0
1 of 2 has LH
thread
Stator coil
Pickup coil
Starter motor
Neutral switch
Ignition coil
Speed sensor
Screw
Screw
Bolt
—
Screw
Bolt
2-13
M6
M5
M6
M10
M5
M6
3
2
2
1
4
1
10
7
10
20
2.5
7
1.0
0.7
1.0
2.0
0.25
0.7
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC
CHASSIS
Item
Standard
Steering system:
Steering bearing type
Front suspension:
Front fork travel
Fork spring free length
Fitting length
Collar length
Spring rate
Stroke
Angular bearing
SSS
140 mm
356.9 mm
319.4 mm
183 mm
8.8 N/mm (0.9 kg/mm)
12.7 N/mm (1.3 kg/mm)
0 X 77.5 mm
77.5 X 140 mm
No
0.464 L
108 mm
Fork oil 10W or equivalent
SSS
350 mm
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
113 mm
179.5 mm
163 mm
117.7 N/mm (12 kg/mm)
0 X 50 mm
No
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
end
SSS
0 mm
radial
lateral
Spoke wheel
18
2.15
Steel
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
1.0 mm
0.5 mm
radial
lateral
Spoke wheel
15M/C
MT4.50
Steel
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
1.0 mm
0.5 mm
(K1)
(K2)
(K1)
(K2)
Optional spring
Oil capacity
Oil level
Oil grade
Rear suspension:
Shock absorber travel
Spring free length
Fitting length
Spring rate
Stroke
Optional spring
Swingarm:
Free play limit
Front wheel:
Type
Rim size
Rim material
Rim runout limit
Rear wheel:
Type
Rim size
Rim material
Rim runout limit
Limit
(K1)
(K1)
2-14
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Front brake:
Type
Disc outside diameter
Disc deflection limit
Pad thickness
Pad thickness
SPEC
Standard
Limit
Dual disc
298
5 mm
SSS
6.2 mm
6.2 mm
SSS
4.5 mm
0.15 mm
0.8 mm
0.8 mm
14.0 mm
25.4 mm
30.1 mm
DOT 4
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
inner
outer
Master cylinder inside diameter
Caliper cylinder inside dimeter
Brake fluid type
Single disc
282
6 mm
SSS
5.55 mm
5.55 mm
12.7 mm
42.9 mm
DOT 4
SSS
5.5 mm
0.15 mm
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
SSS
SSS
Brake lever & brake pedal:
Brake lever free play (at lever end)
Brake pedal position
Brake pedal free play
Clutch lever free play (at lever end)
Throttle grip free play
5 X 8 mm
81.8 mm
0 mm
5 X 10 mm
4 X 6 mm
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
thickness
inner
outer
Master cylinder inside diameter
Caliper cylinder inside diameter
Caliper cylinder inside diameter
Brake fluid type
Rear brake:
Type
Disc outside diameter
Disc deflection limit
Pad thickness
thickeness
2-15
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC
Tightening torques
Thread size
Part to be tightened
g
Upper bracket and inner tube
Lower bracket and inner tube
Upper bracket and steering shaft
Ring nut (steering shaft)
Handlebar holder (lower) and upper bracket
Handlebar holder (lower) and handlebar
holder (upper)
Master cylinder (front brake)
Union bolt (brake hose)
Brake hose holder and lower bracket
Brake hose joint and brake pipe
Brake hose joint and brake hose holder
Front fender and outer tube
Headlight stay and lower bracket
Headlight stay and headlight
Front flasher light and lower bracket
Engine mounting:
Frame and stay (front - upper)
Frame and stay (front - lower)
Stay and engine (front - upper)
Stay and engine (front - lower)
Frame and engine (rear - upper)
Frame and engine (rear - lower)
Down tube and frame
lgnition coil and stay
Muffler stay and frame
Rear shock absorber and relay arm
Rear shock absorber and frame
Pivot shaft and swingarm
Relay arm and frame
Connecting arm and relay arm
Connecting arm and swingarm
Final gear case and swingarm
Swingarm end and holder
Fuel tank and fuel cock
Fuel tank bracket and frame
Rider’s seat
Passenger seat
Fuel tank and top cover
Licence bracket and rear fender stay
Rear fender and rear fender stay
Rear fender and tail/brake light
Rear fender stay and rear flasher light
Frame and rear fender
Side cover (left)
Battery cover
Side cover (right)
Starter relay and leads
2-16
Tightening
torque
Nm
mSkg
M8
M10
M22
—
M12
M8
20
30
110
18
32
28
2.0
3.0
11.0
1.8
3.2
2.8
M6
M10
M6
M10
M6
M8
M6
M6
M6
10
30
10
19
10
10
7
8
7
1.0
3.0
1.0
1.9
1.0
1.0
0.7
0.8
0.7
M10
M10
M12
M10
M10
M10
M10
M5
M8
M10
M10
M16
M10
M12
M12
M10
M8
M6
M8
M6
M6
M5
M6
M5
M6
M12
M8
M6
M6
M6
M6
48
48
74
48
48
48
48
4
30
48
40
90
48
48
48
90
23
7
23
7
7
4
7
4
6
7
26
7
7
7
7
4.8
4.8
7.4
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
0.4
3.0
4.8
4.0
9.0
4.8
4.8
4.8
9.0
2.3
0.7
2.3
0.7
0.7
0.4
0.7
0.4
0.6
0.7
2.6
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
Remarks
See NOTE
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Thread
size
Part to be tightened
g
Passenger footrest and frame
Sidestand bracket and frame
Sidestand and sidestand bracket
Sidestand switch
Brake pedal/footrest and frame
Rear brake master cylinder and master cylinder
bracket
Master cylinder bracket and down tube
Footrest and frame
Front wheel axle
Front wheel axle pinch bolt
Brake caliper
Brake disc and front wheel
Caliper bleed screw
Rear wheel axle nut
Rear brake caliper and caliper bracket
Caliper bracket and swingarm
Brake hose union bolt
Caliper bleed screw
Clutch hub and damper
Final gear case stud bolt
Final gear case stud bolt
Bearing housing (final gear case)
Bearing housing (final gear case)
Drive pinion
Bearing retainer (final drive pinion gear)
Oil filter bolt (final gear)
Oil drain bolt (final gear)
Housing cover
SPEC
Tightening
torque
Nm
mSkg
M8
M10
M10
M5
M6
M8
26
64
56
4
7
23
2.6
6.4
5.6
0.4
0.7
2.3
M8
M10
M16
M8
M10
M8
M7
M16
M10
M10
M10
M8
M10
M10
M8
M8
M10
M14
M65
M14
M14
M10
23
64
59
20
40
23
6
107
40
40
30
6
62
18
9
23
40
130
115
23
23
42
2.3
6.4
5.9
2.0
4.0
2.3
0.6
10.7
4.0
4.0
3.0
0.6
6.2
1.8
0.9
2.3
4.0
13.0
11.5
2.3
2.3
4.2
Remarks
LH thread
NOTE:
1. First, tighten the ring nut approximately 52 Nm (5.2 mSkg) by using the torque wrench, then
loosen the ring nut completely.
2. Retighten the ring nut to specification.
2-17
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC
ELECTRICAL
Item
Standard
Limit
Voltage:
12 V
SSS
Ignition system:
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)
Advancer type
10_ at 1,000 r/min
Digital type
SSS
SSS
T.C.I.:
Pickup coil resistance/color
T.C.I. unit model/manufacturer
189 X 231 Ω at 20_C/Gray – Black
J4T101/MITSUBISHI
SSS
SSS
Ignition coil:
Model/manufacturer
Primary winding resistance
Secondary winding resistance
F6T507 /MITSUBISHI
3.57 X 4.83 Ω at 20_C
10.7 X 14.5 kΩ at 20_C
SSS
SSS
SSS
Spark plug cap:
Type
Resistance
Resin type
10 kΩ
SSS
SSS
Charging system:
Type
Model/manufacturer
Nominal output
Stator coil resistance/color
A.C. magneto
F4T654 /MITSUBISHI
14 V 350 W at 5,000 r/min
0.36 X 0.44 Ω at 20_C/White – White
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
Voltage regulator:
Type
Model/manufacturer
No load regulated voltage
Semi-conductor, short-circuit type
SH650D-11/SHINDENGEN
14.1 X 14.9 V
SSS
SSS
SSS
Rectifier:
Model/manufacturer
Capacity
Withstand voltage
SH650D-11/SHINDENGEN
18 A
200 V
SSS
SSS
SSS
Battery:
Specific gravity
1.320
SSS
Constant mesh type
SSS
SM-13/MITSUBA
0.6 kW
0.026 X 0.034 Ω at 20_C
12.5 mm
7.65 X 10.01 N (780 X 1021 g)
28 mm
0.7 mm
SSS
SSS
SSS
5 mm
SSS
27 mm
SSS
MS5F-421 /JIDECO
180 A
SSS
SSS
Electric starter system:
Type
Starter motor:
Model/manufacturer
Output
Armature coil resistance
Brush overall length
Brush spring pressure
Commutator diameter
Mica undercut
Starter relay:
Model/manufacturer
Amperage rating
2-18
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
SPEC
Standard
Limit
Horn:
Type
Quantity
Model/manufacturer
Maximum amperage
Plane type
1
YF-12/NIKKO
3A
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
Flasher relay:
Type
Model/manufacturer
Self cancelling device
Flasher frequency
Wattage
Full transistor type
FE246BH/DENSO
No
75 X 95 cycle/min
21 W
2 + 3.4W
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
Oil level gauge:
Model/manufacturer
5EL/DENSO
SSS
Starting circuit cut-off relay
Model/manufacturer
G8R-30Y-B/OMRON
SSS
Fuel pump relay:
Model/manufacturer
G8R-30Y-B/OMRON
SSS
Fuse
SSS
Circuit breaker:
Type
Amperage for individual circuit
MAIN
HEAD LIGHT
SIGNALS
IGNITION
BACK UP
Carburetor heater
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
30 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
5A
15 A
30 A
15 A
10 A
5A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2-19
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
SSS
GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
/CONVERSION TABLE
SPEC
EB202001
EAS00028
GENERAL TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
CONVERSION TABLE
All specification data in this manual are listed
in SI and METRIC UNITS.
Use this table to convert METRIC unit data to
IMPERIAL unit data.
This chart specifies torque for standard fasteners with standard I.S.O. pitch threads. Torque
specifications for special components or assemblies are provided for each chapter of this
manual. To avoid warpage, tighten multi-fastener assemblies in a crisscross fashion, in progressive stages, until the specified torque is
reached. Unless otherwise specified, torque
specifications require clean, dry threads. Components should be at room temperature.
Ex.
METRIC
MULTIPLIER
IMP
** mm
x
0.03937
=
** in
2 mm
x
0.03937
=
0.08 in
CONVERSION TABLE
METRIC TO IMP
Known
A: Distance between flats
B: Outside thread diameter
A
(nut)
B
(Bolt)
10 mm
6 mm
General torque
specifications
mSkg
Nm
6
8 mm
15
1,5
14 mm
10 mm
30
3,0
17 mm
12 mm
55
5,5
19 mm
14 mm
85
8,5
22 mm
16 mm
130
13,0
2-20
Result
Torque
mSkg
mSkg
cmSkg
cmSkg
7.233
86.794
0.0723
0.8679
ftSlb
inSlb
ftSlb
inSlb
Weight
kg
g
2.205
0.03527
lb
oz
Distance
km / hr
km
m
m
cm
mm
0.6214
0.6214
3.281
1.094
0.3937
0.03937
mph
mi
ft
yd
in
in
Volume /
Capacity
cc (cm3)
cc (cm3)
lt (liter)
It (liter)
0.03527
0.06102
0.8799
0.2199
oz (IMP liq.)
cuSin
qt (IMP liq.)
gal (IMP liq.)
Miscellaneous
kg / mm
lb / in
55.997
kg / cm2
psi (lb / in2)
14.2234
Centigrade
Fahrenheit (_F)
9/5 (_C) + 32
0,6
12 mm
Multiplier
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
SPEC
EB203000
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
ENGINE
Lubrication point
Symbol
Oil seal lips
O-ring
Bearing
Connecting rod bolt/nut
Connecting rod small end and big end
Crankshaft pin
Crankshaft journal/big end
Piston surface
Piston pin
Camshaft cam lobe/journal
Rocker arm shaft
Valve stem (IN, EX)
Valve stem end (IN, EX)
Timing chain drive gear shafts/sprokets
Oil pump rotor (inner/outer), housing
Idle gear surface
Starter idle gear
Starter idle gear shaft
Starter oneway cam
Middle drive gear
Primary driven gear
Push rod 1, 2
Transmission gear (wheel/pinion)
Shift cam
Shift fork/guide bar
Shift shaft assembly
Push rod ball
Push lever assembly
2-21
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
SPEC
EB203010
CHASSIS
Symbol
Lubrication point
Steering head pipe (upper/lower), bearing
Steering head pipe, bearing cover lip
Steering head pipe, oil seal lip
Front wheel oil seal lip (right/left)
Rear wheel oil seal lip
Clutch hub fitting area
Rear brake pedal shaft
Shift pedal shaft
Sidestand bolt, sidestand sliding surface
Tube guide (throttle grip) inner surface
Brake lever pivot bolt, contact surface
Clutch lever pivot bolt, contact surface
Rear shock absorber (lower) oil seal lip
Swingarm pivot bearing inner surface
Swingarm pivot oil seal lip
Relay arm bearing, collar and oil seal
Drive shaft spline
Drive shaft dust cover
2-22
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS
EB205000
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS
1 Rocker arm shaft (intake)
2 Rocker arm shaft (exhaust)
3 Oil filter
4 Oil pump
5 Drive axle
6 Middle drive shaft
2-23
SPEC
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS
1 Oil pump
2 Releaf valve
3 Oil filter
4 Middle drive shaft
2-24
SPEC
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS
1 Camshaft
2 Crankshaft
3 Main axle
4 Middle drive shaft
5 Drive axle
6 Connecting rod big end
2-25
SPEC
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
EB206000
CABLE ROUTING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Clutch cable
Starter cable
Handlebar switch lead (left)
Handlebar switch lead (right)
High tension code
Starter cable
Throttle cable
Fuel hose (fuel cock-fuel filter)
Fuse box
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Alarm connector
Fuel pump lead
Speed sensor lead
Sidestand switch lead
Neutral switch lead
Pickup coil lead
AC magneto lead
Ventilation hose
Sensing hose (AIS-carburetor
joint)
2-26
Fuel hose (carburetor-fuel pump)
Brake hose
Heat protector
Fuel breather hose (fuel tankroll over valve) (for California)
23 Speedometer lead
24 Wireharness
25 Purge hose (carburetor-solenoid
valve) (for California)
19
20
21
22
CABLE ROUTING
27
26 Purge hose (carburetor-solenoid B Position the throttle cable and
valve) (for California)
A Fasten the handlebar switch
leads (left and right) to the
handlebar with plastic locking
tie.
starter cable as shown, and
clamp them with holder.
C Clamp the wire harness with
the hook of frame side.
D When installing the pipe of
throttle cables, press it inside.
E Connect the sensing hose
(carburetor joint-AIS side) with
a nozzle.
2-27
SPEC
F Push the wire harness inside
of the tool box plate.
G Route the sidestand lead
inside of engine cover.
H Position the all connectors
inside of the connector cover.
I Route the clutch cable through
the cable guide.
CABLE ROUTING
J Fasten the handlebar switch
leads (left and right) under the
handle crown with a plastic
band.
Set the band at four notches,
and install it no slacking.
K Route the each hoses through
the frame guide and do not
pinch it.
L When installing the fitting plate,
do not pinch the each hoses
and wire harness.
M Fasten the AC magneto lead
and sidestand switch lead with a
plastic locking tie.
N Fasten the alarm lead with a
plastic band on the lid.
2-28
SPEC
E
CABLE ROUTING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Battery
Battery positive (+) lead
Starter motor positive (+) lead
Speedometer lead
Fuel hose (carburetor-fuel pump)
High tension code
Main switch lead
Throttle cable
Brake hose
Handlebar switch lead (right)
Headlight lead
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Ignition coil
Master cylinder reservoir hose
Breather hose
Air filter drain hose
Battery negative (–) lead
Rear brake switch lead
Rear brake hose
Carburetor heater connector
Rectifier/ regulator
Main switch lead
Flasher relay
2-29
SPEC
Handlebar switch lead (left)
Throttle position sensor lead
Carburetor heater lead
Thermo switch lead
Starting circuit cutoff relay
Down tube
High tension code
Purge hose (carburetorsolenoid valve) (for California)
31 Carburetor heater lead
32 Oil level switch lead
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
E
CABLE ROUTING
A Clamp the battery positive (+)
lead to the battery with battery
band.
B Connect the battery negative
(–) lead connector and push it
into the space between battery
box and battery.
C Route the rectifier / regulator
lead, wire harness and starter
motor positive (+) lead through
the outside of frame bracket
and fasten them to the frame
with a plastic locking tie.
D Connect the purge hose
(carburetor side-solenoid valve
side) with joint. (for California)
E Route the front turn signal light
lead and headlight lead through
the rear of headlight body hole.
F Connect the ignition coil lead at
red tape to the right side.
G Fasten the rear brake switch
lead to the brake switch bracket
with a plastic locking tie.
2-30
SPEC
H Fasten the rear brake switch
lead and master cylinder
reservoir hose to the down
tube with a plastic locking tie.
I Fasten the wire harness,
starter motor positive (+) lead
and battery negative (–) lead to
the frame with a plastic locking tie.
J Route the rectifier / regulator
lead and carburetor heater lead
through inside of battery box
hole to outside it and connect
them.
E
CABLE ROUTING
K To rear brake caliper
L Clamp the handlebar switch
lead (right) and main switch
lead to the frame with a holder.
M Arrange the throttle position
sensor connector, carburetor
heater connector and thermo
switch connector between the
starting circuit cutoff relay and
high tension code.
N Fasten the rear brake switch
to the down tube with a plastic
locking tie.
2-31
SPEC
E
CABLE ROUTING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Brake hose
Throttle cable
Master cylinder reservoir hose
High tension code
Purge hose (carburetor-solenoid
valve) (for California)
Rear brake switch lead
Brake hose
Sensing hose (AIS-carburetor
joint)
Fuel hose (carburetor-fuel
pump)
Battery negative (–) lead
11 Battery negative (–) lead
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
connector
Battery
Battery positive (+) lead
Taillight lead
Starter relay
Starter motor positive (+) lead
Speedometer lead connector
Fuel tank breather hose
(fuel tank-roll over valve) (for
California)
Ventilation hose
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
SPEC
Starter cable
Fuel hose (fuel cock-fuel filter)
Carburetor heater lead
Thermo switch lead
Igniter unit
Taillight lead
Throttle position sensor lead
Fuel filter
Igniter unit lead
Frame
Wire harness
A Clamp the throttle cables with
the holder.
2-32
E
CABLE ROUTING
B Route the rear brake switch
lead under the master cylinder
reservoir hose.
C Position the band end of right
side bracket.
D Position the steel band end to
forward.
E Position the steel band end to
right side.
F Route the battery positive (+)
lead through the slit of the
battery box.
G Clamp the igniter unit lead to
the frame with a holder.
H To the rear fender.
I Route the fuel tank breather
hose under the fuel filter and
connect it (fuel tank side-roll
over valve side) with a joint.
Position the end of clip outside.
2-33
SPEC
J Fasten the wire harness with a
band on the tool box plate.
K Fasten the wire harness to the
frame with a plastic locking tie.
Position the locking tie front of
the solder.
E
CABLE ROUTING
L Route wire harness outside of
the guide on the frame.
M Clamp the clutch cable and
starter cable with a holder.
Position the end of holder down
side.
N Route the throttle position
sensor lead and carburetor
heater lead left side of the
tappet cover.
O To the wire harness.
P Route the igniter lead through
the igniter plate hole to the wire
harness.
Q Clamp the taillight lead with
mud guard clamp.
R Clamp the taillight lead with a
holder on the mud guard.
2-34
SPEC
E
CABLE ROUTING
1
2
3
4
5
6
Throttle cable
Starter cable
Clutch cable
Handlebar switch lead (left)
Headlight lead
Brake hose
A Route the handlebar switch
lead (right) rear side of the
throttle cable.
2-35
SPEC
INSP
ADJ
3
INSP
ADJ
CHAPTER 3
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
FUEL TANK AND SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR JOINT AND INTAKE
MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE BREATHER HOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-5
3-8
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY . . . . . .
CHECKING THE TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING AND TIGHTENING THE SPOKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-31
3-31
3-32
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-20
3-20
3-21
INSP
ADJ
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-37
3-37
3-43
3-44
3-45
INTRODUCTION/PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/
LUBRICATION INTERVALS
INSP
ADJ
EB300000
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter includes all information necessary to perform recommended inspections and adjustments. These preventive maintenance procedures, if followed, will ensure more reliable vehicle operation and a longer service life. The need for costly overhaul work will be greatly reduced. This information applies to vehicles already in service as well as to new vehicles that are being prepared for sale. All
service technicians should be familiar with this entire chapter.
EB301000
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS
EVERY
NO.
ITEM
CHECKS AND MAINTENANCE JOBS
Initial
(1,000 km)
6,000 km
or
6 months
(whichever
comes first)
12,000 km
or
12 months
(whichever
comes first)
√
√
1
*
Fuel line (manual cock)
Check fuel hoses for cracks or damage.
Replace if necessary.
2
*
Fuel filter
Check condition.
Replace if necessary.
Spark plugs
Check condition.
Clean, regap or replace if necessary.
√
√
√
Valves (arm SOHC)
Check valve clearance.
Adjust if necessary.
√
√
√
Air filter
Clean or replace if necessary.
√
√
Clutch
Check operation.
Adjust or replace cable.
√
√
√
3
4
*
5
6
√
7
*
Front brake (disc)
Check operation, fluid level and vehicle for fluid leakage.
(See NOTE.)
Correct accordingly.
Repalce brake pads if necessary.
√
√
√
8
*
Rear brake (disc)
Check operation, fluid level and vehicle for fluid leakage.
(See NOTE.)
Correct accordingly.
Replace brake pads if necessary.
√
√
√
9
*
Wheels (spoke)
Check balance, runout, spoke tightness and for damage.
Tighten spokes and rebalance, replace if necessary.
√
√
10 *
Tires (EUR)
√
√
11 *
Wheel bearings
Check bearing for looseness or damage.
Replace if necessary.
√
√
Swingarm (no nipple)
Check swingarm pivoting point for play.
Correct if necessary.
Lubricate with molybdenum disulfide grease every
24,000 km or 24 months (whichever comes first).
√
√
13 *
Steering bearings
Check bearing play and steering for roughness.
Correct accordingly.
Lubricate with lithium soap base grease every 24,000
km or 24 months (whichever comes first).
√
√
14 *
Chassis fasteners
Make sure that all nuts, bolts and screws are properly
tightened.
Tighten if necessary.
√
√
15
Sidestand
Check operation.
Lubricate and repair if necessary.
√
√
16 *
Sidestand switch
Check operation.
Replace if necessary.
√
√
12 *
Check tread depth and for damage.
Replace if necessary.
Check air pressure.
Correct if necessary.
√
3-1
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE/LUBRICATION INTERVALS
INSP
ADJ
EVERY
NO.
ITEM
CHECKS AND MAINTENANCE JOBS
Initial
(1,000 km)
6,000 km
or
6 months
(whichever
comes first)
12,000 km
or
12 months
(whichever
comes first)
17 *
Front fork
Check operation and for oil leakage.
Correct accordingly.
√
√
18 *
Rear shock absorber
assembly
Check operation and shock absorber for oil leakage.
Replace shock absorber assembly if necessary.
√
√
19 *
Carburetors (multi)
Check engine idlilng speed, synchronization and starter operation.
Adjust if necessary.
√
√
√
20
Engine oil
Check oil level and vehicle for oil leakage.
Correct if necessary.
Change. (Warm engine before draining.)
√
√
√
21 *
Engine oil filter
element
Replace.
√
22
Final gear oil
Check oil level and vehicle for oil leakage.
Change oil at initial 1,000 km and thereafter every
24,000 km or 24 months (whichever comes first).
√
√
√
√
* Since these items require special tools, data and technical skills, they should be serviced by a Yamaha dealer.
NOTE:
The air filter needs more frequent service if you are riding in unusually wet or dusty areas.
Hydraulic brake system
– When disassembling the master cylinder or caliper cylinder, always replace the brake fluid. Check
the brake fluid level regularly and fill as required.
– Replace the oil seals on the inner parts of the master cylinder and caliper cylinder every two years.
– Replace the brake hoses every four years or if cracked or damaged.
3-2
FUEL TANK AND SEATS
INSP
ADJ
FUEL TANK AND SEATS
23Nm (2.3mkg)
7 Nm (0.7mkg)
7 Nm (0.7mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order below.
1
2
3
4
Fuel tank and seats removal
Passenger seat
Seat bracket
Rider’s seat
Fuel hose
1
1
1
1
5
6
7
8
Ignitor plate
Mud guard
Meter lead couper
Fuel tank assembly
1
1
1
1
NOTE:
Set the fuel cock to “OFF” before disconnecting the fuel hose.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
3-3
FUEL TANK AND SEATS
INSP
ADJ
REMOVAL
1. Remove:
Ignitor plate
NOTE:
To remove the quick fastener, push its center in
with a screwdriver, then pull the fastener out.
INSTALLATION
1. Install:
Ignitor plate
NOTE:
To install the quick fastener, push its pin so that it
protrudes from the fastener head, then insert
the fastener into the cowling and push the pin a
in with a screwdriver. Make sure that the pin is
flush with the fastener’s head.
3-4
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
INSP
ADJ
EAS00047
ENGINE
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves.
NOTE:
Valve clearance adjustment should be made
on a cold engine, at room temperature.
When the valve clearance is to be measured or
adjusted, the piston must be at top dead center
(TDC) on the compression stroke.
1. Remove:
rider’s seat
fuel tank
Refer to “FUEL TANK AND SEATS”.
2. Disconnect:
spark plug caps
3. Remove:
spark plugs
4. Remove:
air intake box 1
5. Remove:
cylinder head cover (rear cylinder) 1
cylinder head cover (front cylinder)
3-5
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
INSP
ADJ
6. Remove:
tappet covers 1
7. Remove:
camshaft sprocket cover (rear cylinder) 1
camshaft sprocket cover (front cylinder)
8. Remove:
timing plug 1
straight plug 2
9. Measure:
valve clearance
Out of specification Adjust.
Valve clearance (cold):
Intake valve:
0.07 0.12 mm
Exhaust valve:
0.12 0.17 mm
3-6
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
A
INSP
ADJ
a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise.
b. When the piston is at TDC on the compression stroke, align either the camshaft sprocket plate hole a with the stationary pointer b
on the cylinder head. When the camshaft
sprocket plate hole or camshaft sprocket
punch mark is aligned with the stationary
pointer, the piston is at top dead center
(TDC).
c. Align the TDC mark c on the generator rotor
with the stationary pointer d on the crankcase.
A Rear cylinder (“TI” mark)
B Front cylinder (“I” mark)
B
d. Measure the valve clearance with a thickness gauge 1 .
e. Turn the crankshaft crockwise 290_, and
then measure the front cylinder.
10. Adjust
_ valve clearance
a. Loosen the locknut 1 .
b. Insert a thickness gauge between the end of
the adjusting screw and the valve tip.
c. Turn the adjusting screw 2 in direction a or
b until the specified valve clearance is obtained.
Direction a
Valve clearance is
decreased.
Direction b
Valve clearance is
increased.
d. Hold the adjusting screw to prevent it from
moving and tighten the locknut to specification.
3-7
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE/
SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS
INSP
ADJ
Locknut:
27 Nm (2.7 mkg)
e. Measure the valve clearance again.
f. If the valve clearance is still out of specification, repeat all of the valve clearance adjustment steps until the specified clearance is
obtained.
11. Install:
all removed parts
NOTE:
Install all removed parts in the reverse order of
their disassembly. Note the following points.
camshaft sprocket covers
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
tappet covers
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
spark plugs
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
EAS00051
SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS
NOTE:
Prior to synchronizing the carburetors, the valve
clearance and the engine idling speed should
be properly adjusted and the ignition timing
should be checked.
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.
2. Remove:
rider’s seat
fuel tank
Refer to “FUEL TANK AND SEATS”.
3. Remove:
air duct 1
4. Remove:
vacuum plugs 1
3-8
SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS
INSP
ADJ
5. Install:
vacuum gauge 1
engine tachometer 2
(to the spark plug lead of cyl. #2)
Vacuum gauge:
90890-03094
Engine tachometer:
90890-03113
6. Start the engine and let it warm up for several
minutes.
7. Check:
engine idling speed
Out of specification Adjust.
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING
SPEED”.
Engine idling speed:
950 1,050 r/min
8. Adjust:
Carburetor synchronization
a. Synchronize carburetor #1 to carburetor #2
by turning the synchronizing screw 1 in either direction until both gauges read the
same.
b. Rev the engine two or three times, each time
for less than a second, and check the synchronization again.
Vacuum pressure at idle speed:
34.7 37.3 kPa (260 280 mmHg)
NOTE:
The difference between the two carburetors
should not exceed 1.33 kPa (10 mmHg).
9. Check:
engine idling speed
Out of specification Adjust.
10. Stop the engine and remove the measuring
equipment.
11. Adjust:
throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE
CABLE FREE PLAY”.
3-9
SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS/
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED
INSP
ADJ
Throttle cable free play (at the
flange of the throttle grip)
4 6 mm
12. Install:
vacuum plugs
air duct
fuel tank
seat
EAS00054
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED
NOTE:
Prior to adjusting the engine idling speed, the
carburetor synchronization should be adjusted
properly, the air filter should be clean, and the
engine should have adequate compression.
1. Start the engine and let it warm up for several
minutes.
2. Remove:
cylinder head cover 1
3. Install:
engine tachometer
(to the spark plug lead of cyl. #1)
Engine tachometer:
90890-03113
4. Check:
engine idling speed
Out of specification Adjust.
Engine idling speed:
950 1,050 r/min
5. Adjust:
engine idling speed
a. Turn the pilot screw 1 in until it is lightly
seated.
b. Turn the pilot screw out the specified number
of turns.
Pilot screw
3 turns out
c. Turn the throttle stop screw 2 in direction a
or b until the specified engine idling speed is
obtained.
3-10
Direction a
Engine idling speed is
increased.
Direction b
Engine idling speed is
decreased.
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED/
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY
INSP
ADJ
6. Adjust:
throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE
CABLE FREE PLAY”.
Throttle cable free play (at the
flange of the throttle grip)
4 6 mm
EAS00058
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE
PLAY
NOTE:
Prior to adjusting the throttle cable free play, the
engine idling speed should be adjusted.
1. Check:
throttle cable free play a
Out of specification Adjust.
Throttle cable free play (at the
flange of the throttle grip)
4 6 mm
2. Remove:
rider’s seat
fuel tank
Refer to “FUEL TANK AND SEATS”.
3. Adjust:
throttle cable free play
NOTE:
When the motorcycle is accelerating, the accelerator cable 1 is pulled.
Carburetor side
a. Loosen the locknut 2 on the accelerator cable.
b. Turn the adjusting nut 3 in direction a or b
until the specified throttle cable free play is
obtained.
Direction a
Throttle cable free play
is decreased.
Direction b
Throttle cable free play
is increased.
c. Tighten the locknuts.
NOTE:
If the specified throttle cable free play cannot be
obtained on the carburetor side of the cable, use
the adjusting nut on the handlebar side.
3-11
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY/
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS
INSP
ADJ
Handlebar side
a. Loosen the locknut 1 .
b. Turn the adjusting nut 2 in direction a or b
until the specified throttle cable free play is
obtained.
Direction a
Throttle cable free play is
increased.
Direction b
Throttle cable free play is
decreased.
c. Tighten the locknut.
WARNING
After adjusting the throttle cable free play,
turn the handlebar to the right and to the left
to ensure that this does not cause the engine idling speed to change.
EAS00059
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS
The following procedure applies to all of the
spark plugs.
1. Remove:
cylinder head covers 1
2. Disconnect:
spark plug cap
3. Remove:
spark plug
CAUTION:
Before removing the spark plugs, blow away
any dirt accumulated in the spark plug wells
with compressed air to prevent it from falling into the cylinders.
4. Check:
spark plug type
Incorrect Change.
Spark plug type (manufacturer)
BPR7ES (NGK)
W22EPR-U (DENSO)
5. Check:
electrode 1
Damage/wear Replace the spark plug.
insulator 2
Abnormal color Replace the spark plug.
Normal color is a medium-to-light tan color.
6. Clean:
spark plug
(with a spark plug cleaner or wire brush)
3-12
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS/
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING
INSP
ADJ
7. Measure:
spark plug gap a
(with a wire gauge)
Out of specification Regap.
Spark plug gap
0.7 0.8 mm
8. Install:
spark plug
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
NOTE:
Before installing the spark plug, clean the spark
plug and gasket surface.
9. Connect:
spark plug cap
EAS00064
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING
NOTE:
Prior to checking the ignition timing, check the
wiring connections of the entire ignition system.
Make sure that all connections are tight and free
of corrosion.
1. Remove:
timing plug 1
2. Install:
timing light 1
engine tachometer 2
(to the spark plug lead of cyl. #1)
Timing light:
90890-03141
Engine tachometer:
90890-03113
3-13
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING/
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE
INSP
ADJ
3. Check:
ignition timing
a. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then let it run at the specified engine idling speed.
Engine idling speed:
950 1,050 r/min
b. Check that the stationary pointer a is within
the firing range b on the generator rotor.
Incorrect firing range Check the ignition
system.
NOTE:
The ignition timing is not adjustable.
4. Install:
timing plug 1
EAS00065
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE
The following procedure applies to all of the cylinders.
NOTE:
Insufficient compression pressure will result in a
loss of performance.
1. Check:
valve clearance
Out of specification Adjust.
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE”.
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
3. Disconnect:
spark plug cap
4. Remove:
spark plug
3-14
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE
INSP
ADJ
CAUTION:
Before removing the spark plugs, use compressed air to blow away any dirt accumulated in the spark plug wells to prevent it
from falling into the cylinders.
5. Install:
compression gauge 1
Compression gauge set:
90890-03081
6. Measure:
compression pressure
Above the maximum pressure Inspect the
cylinder head, valve surfaces, and piston
crown for carbon deposits.
Below the minimum pressure Squirt a few
drops of oil into the affected cylinder and
measure again.
Refer to the following table.
Compression pressure
(with oil applied in the cylinder)
Reading
Diagnosis
Higher than Piston wear or damage
without oil
Repair.
Same as
without oil
Piston ring(-s), valves, cylinder head gasket or piston
possibly defective Repair.
Compression pressure (at sea
level)
Standard:
1,000 kPa (10 kg/cm2, 10 bar)
Minimum:
900 kPa (9 kg/cm2, 9 bar)
Maximum:
1,100 kPa (11 kg/cm2, 11 bar)
a. Turn the main switch to “ON”.
b. With the throttle wide open, crank the engine
until the reading on the compression gauge
stabilized.
WARNING
To prevent sparking, ground all spark plug
leads before cranking the engine.
NOTE:
The difference in compression pressure between cylinders should not exceed 100 kPa (1
kg/cm2, 1 bar).
3-15
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE/
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
7. Install:
spark plug
8. Connect:
spark plug cap
INSP
ADJ
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
EAS00069
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.
Make sure that the motorcycle is upright.
2. Let the engine idle for a few minutes.
3. Check:
engine oil level
The engine oil level should be between the
minimum level marks a and maximum level
marks b .
Below the minimum level mark Add the
recommended engine oil to the proper level.
Recommended engine oil
Refer to the chart for the
engine oil grade which is best
suited for certain atmospheric
temperatures.
API standard
SE or higher grade
ACEA standard
G4 or G5
CAUTION:
Engine oil also lubricates the clutch and
the wrong oil types or additives could
cause clutch slippage. Therefore, do not
add any chemical additives or use engine
oils with a grade of CD a or higher and do
not use oils labeled “ENERGY CONSERVING II” b or higher.
Do not allow foreign materials to enter the
crankcase.
3-16
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL/
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
INSP
ADJ
4. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
5. Check the engine oil level again.
NOTE:
Before checking the engine oil level, wait a few
minutes until the oil has settled.
EAS00075
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
1. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
2. Place a container under the engine oil drain
bolt.
3. Remove:
engine oil filler cap 1
o-ring
engine oil drain bolt 2
gasket
4. Drain:
engine oil
(completely from the crankcase)
5. If the oil filter element is also to be replaced,
perform the following procedure.
WARNING
Oil filter element replacement should be
made cold exhaust pipe and muffler, at room
temperature.
a. Remove the muffler 1 , rear brake reservoir
tank 2 , element cover 3 and exhaust pipe
(front cylinder) 4 .
b. Remove the oil filter element cover plate 5 ,
element cover 6 and oil filter element 7 .
c. Check the O-ring 8 and replace it if it is
cracked or damaged.
d. Install the new oil filter element and the element cover.
Oil filter element cover bolt
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
e. Install the exhaust pipe (front cylinder), element cover plate, rear brake reservoir tank
and muffler.
Refer to “ENGINE” in chapter 4.
6. Check:
engine oil drain bolt gasket
Damage Replace.
7. Install:
gasket
engine oil drain bolt
43 Nm (4.3 mkg)
8. Fill:
crankcase
(with the specified amount of the recommended engine oil)
3-17
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL/
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY
INSP
ADJ
Quantity
Total amount
3.6 L
Without oil filter element
replacement
3.0 L
With oil filter element
replacement
3.1 L
9. Install:
o-ring
engine oil filter cap
10. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
11. Check:
engine
(for engine oil leaks)
12. Check:
engine oil level
Refer to “CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
LEVEL”.
EAS00078
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE
PLAY
1. Check:
clutch cable free play a
Out of specification Adjust.
Clutch cable free play (at the end
of the clutch lever)
5 10 mm
2. Adjust:
clutch cable free play
Handlebar side
a. Loosen the locknut 1 .
b. Turn the adjusting screw 2 in direction b or
c until the specified clutch cable free play is
obtained.
Direction b
Clutch cable free play is
increased.
Direction c
Clutch cable free play is
decreased.
c. Tighten the locknut.
NOTE:
If the specified clutch cable free play cannot be
obtained as described above, perform the mechanism adjustment procedure described below.
3. Remove:
left side cover 1
clutch adjusting cover 2
3-18
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY/
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT
INSP
ADJ
4. Adjust:
clutch mechanism
Engine side
a. Loosen the locknut 1 .
b. Turn in the adjusting screw 2 until it is lightly
seated.
c. Turn the adjusting screw out 1/4 of a turn.
d. Tighten the locknut.
e. Check the clutch cable free play again and
ajust it if necessary.
EAS00086
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT
1. Remove:
air filter case cover 1
air filter element 2
2. Clean:
air filter element
Apply compressed air to the outer surface of
the air filter element.
3. Check:
air filter element
Damage Replace.
4. Install:
air filter element
air filter case cover
3-19
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT /
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR JOINT AND INTAKE MANIFOLD /
CHECKING THE BREATHER HOSE
INSP
ADJ
CAUTION:
Never operate the engine without the air filter
element installed. Unfiltered air will cause
rapid wear of engine parts and may damage
the engine. Operating the engine without the
air filter element will also affect the carburetor
turning, leading to poor engine performance
and possible overheating.
NOTE:
When installing the air filter element into the air
filter case cover, be sure their sealing surfaces
are aligned to prevent any air leaks.
EAS00094
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR JOINT AND
INTAKE MANIFOLD
1. Check:
carburetor joint 1
Cracks/damage Replace.
Refer to “CARBURETOR” in chapter 6.
EAS00098
CHECKING THE BREATHER HOSE
1. Remove:
cylinder head cover
2. Check:
cylinder head breather hose 1
Cracks/damage Replace.
Loose connection Connect properly.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the cylinder head breather
hose is routed correctly.
3-20
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
INSP
ADJ
EAS00100
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
The following procedure applies to all of the exhaust pipes, mufflers and gaskets.
1. Check:
exhaust pipes 1
muffler 2
Cracks/damage Replace.
gaskets 3
Exhaust gas leaks Replace.
2. Check:
tightening torque
Exhaust pipe nut 4
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
Exhaust pipe and muffler bolt 5
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
Muffler and muffler bracket bolt 6
25 Nm (2.5 mkg)
3-21
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE
INSP
ADJ
EAS00108
CHASSIS
ADJUSTING THE FRONT BRAKE
1. Check:
brake lever free play a
Out of specification Adjust.
Brake lever free play (at the end
of the brake lever)
5 8 mm
2. Adjust:
brake lever free play
a. Loosen the locknut 1 .
b. Turn the adjusting bolt 2 in direction b or c
until the specified brake lever free play is obtained.
Direction b Brake lever free play is
increased.
Direction c Brake lever free play is
decreased.
c. Tighten the locknut.
WARNING
A soft or spongy feeling in the brake lever
can indicate the presence of air in the brake
system. Before the vehicle is operated, the
air must be removed by bleeding the brake
system. Air in the brake system will considerably reduce braking performance and
could result in loss of control and possibly
an accident. Therefore, inspect and, if necessary, bleed the brake system.
CAUTION:
After adjusting the brake lever free play,
make sure that there is no brake drag.
3-22
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
INSP
ADJ
EAS00110
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
1. Check:
brake pedal position
(distance a from the top of the rider footrest
to the top of the brake pedal)
Out of specification Adjust.
Brake pedal position (below the
top of the rider footrest)
81.8 mm
2. Adjust:
brake pedal position
a. Loosen the locknut 1 .
b. Turn the adjusting bolt 2 in direction b or c
until the specified brake pedal position is obtained.
Direction b Brake pedal is raised.
Direction c Brake pedal is lowered.
WARNING
After adjusting the brake pedal position,
check that the end of the adjusting bolt 2 is
visible through the hole d .
c. Tighten the locknut 1 to specification.
Locknut
16 Nm (1.6 mkg)
WARNING
A soft or spongy feeling in the brake pedal
can indicate the presence of air in the brake
system. Before the vehicle is operated, the
air must be removed by bleeding the brake
system. Air in the brake system will considerably reduce braking performance and
could result in loss of control and possibly
an accident. Therefore, inspect and, if necessary, bleed the brake system.
CAUTION:
After adjusting the brake pedal position,
make sure that there is no brake drag.
3. Adjust:
rear brake light switch
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
LIGHT SWITCH”.
3-23
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
INSP
ADJ
EAS00115
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.
Make sure that the motorcycle is upright.
2. Check;
brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
A
Recommended brake fluid
DOT 4
A Front brake
B Rear brake
WARNING
B
Use only the designated brake fluid. Other
brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to
deteriorate, causing leakage and poor
brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluid that
is already in the system. Mixing brake
fluids may result in a harmful chemical
reaction, leading to poor brake performance.
When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the reservoir. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the brake
fluid and could cause vapor lock.
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean
up any spilt brake fluid immediately.
NOTE:
In order to ensure a correct reading of the brake
fluid level, make sure that the top of the reservoir is horizontal.
3-24
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH/
CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES
INSP
ADJ
EAS00128
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT
SWITCH
NOTE:
The rear brake light switch is operated by movement of the brake pedal.
The rear brake light switch is properly adjusted
when the brake light comes on just before the
braking effect starts.
1. Check:
rear brake light operation timing
Incorrect Adjust.
2. Adjust:
rear brake light operation timing
a. Hold the main body 1 of the rear brake light
switch so that it does not rotate and turn the
adjusting nut 2 in direction a or b until the
rear brake light comes on at the proper time.
Direction a Brake light comes on
sooner.
Direction b Brake light comes on
later.
EAS00131
CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES
The following procedure applies to all of the
brake hoses and clamps.
1. Check:
brake hose
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
2. Check:
brake hose clamp
Loose connection Tighten.
3. Hold the motorcycle upright and apply the
brake.
4. Check:
brake hose
Activate the brake several times.
Brake fluid leakage Replace the damaged
hose.
Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES” in
chapter 7.
3-25
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM
INSP
ADJ
EAS00134
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING
Bleed the hydraulic brake system whenever:
the system was disassembled,
a brake hose was loosened or removed,
the brake fluid level is very low,
brake operation is faulty.
NOTE:
Be careful not to spill any brake fluid or allow
the brake master cylinder reservoir or brake
fluid reservoir to overflow.
When bleeding the hydraulic brake system,
make sure that there is always enough brake
fluid before applying the brake. Ignoring this
precaution could allow air to enter the hydraulic brake system, considerably lengthening the
bleeding procedure.
If bleeding is difficult, it may be necessary to let
the brake fluid settle for a few hours. Repeat
the bleeding procedure when the tiny bubbles
in the hose have disappeared.
1. Stand the motorcycle on alevel surface.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.
Make sure that the motorcycle is upright.
2. Bleed:
hydraulic brake system
A
a. Add the recommended brake fluid to the
proper level.
b. Install the diaphragm (brake master cylinder
reservoir or brake fluid reservoir).
c. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly to the
bleed screw 2 .
A : Front
B : Rear
d. Place the other end of the hose into a container.
e. Slowly apply the brake several times.
f. Fully squeeze the brake lever or fully depress the brake pedal and hold it in position.
g. Loosen the bleed screw.
This will release the tension and cause the
brake lever to contact the throttle grip or the
brake pedal to fully extend.
B
3-26
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM/
ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL
INSP
ADJ
h. Tighten the bleed screw and then release the
brake lever or brake pedal.
i. Repeat steps (e) to (h) until all of the air
bubbles have disappeared from the brake
fluid in the plastic hose.
j. Tighten the bleed screw to specification.
Bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 mkg)
k. Fill the reservoir to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL”.
WARNING
After bleeding the hydraulic brake system,
check the brake operation.
EAS00137
ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL
NOTE:
The shift pedal position is determined by the adjusting bolt length a .
1. Measure:
adjusting the length a
Incorrect Adjust.
Adjusting bolt length
114.7 mm
2. Adjust:
adjusting bolt length a
a. Loosen both locknuts 1
b. Turn the adjusting bolt 2 in direction b or c
to obtain the correct shift pedal position.
Direction b shift pedal is raised.
Direction c shift pedal is lowered.
3-27
CHECKING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL LEVEL/
CHANGING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL
INSP
ADJ
EAS00144
CHECKING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL LEVEL
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.
Make sure that the motorcycle is upright.
2. Remove:
final drive housing oil filler bolt 1
3. Check:
final drive oil level
The final drive oil level should be to the bottom brim 2 of the filler hole.
Below the bottom brim Add the recommended final drive oil to the proper level.
Recommended final drive oil
SAE 80 hypoid gear oil graded
“GL-4”, “GL-5” or “GL-6”
or
multi-purpose SAE 80W90
hypoid gear oil
4. Install:
final drive housing oil filler bolt
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
EAS00145
CHANGING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL
1. Place a container under the final drive housing.
2. Remove:
final drive housing oil filler bolt 1
final drive housing oil drain bolt 2
Completely drain the final drive housing of its
oil.
3. Check:
final drive housing oil drain bolt gasket
Damage Replace.
4. Install:
final drive housing oil drain bolt
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
5. Fill:
final drive housing
(with the specified amount of the recommended final drive oil)
3-28
CHANGING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL/
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD
INSP
ADJ
Quantity
0.2 L
Refer to “CHECKING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL
LEVEL”.
EAS00146
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that
the front wheel is elevated.
2. Check:
steering head
Grasp the bottom of the front fork legs and
gently rock the front fork.
Looseness or binding Adjust the steering
head.
3. Remove:
upper bracket pinch bolt 1
steering stem nut 2
upper bracket 3
4. Adjust:
steering head
a. Remove the lock washr 1 , the upper ring nut
2 , and the rubber washer 3 .
3-29
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD
INSP
ADJ
b. Loosen the lower ring nut 4 and then tighten
it to specification with a ring nut wrench 5 .
NOTE:
Set the torque wrench at a right angle to the ring
nut wrench.
Ring nut wrench
90890-01403
Lower ring nut (initial tightening
torque)
52 Nm (5.2 mkg)
c. Loosen the lower ring nut 4 completely, then
tighten it to specification.
WARNING
Do not overtighten the lower ring nut.
Lower ring nut (final tightening
torque)
18 Nm (1.8 mkg)
d. Check the steering head for looseness or
binding by turning the front fork all the way in
both directions. If any binding is felt, remove
the lower bracket and inspect the upper and
lower bearings.
Refer to “STEERING HEAD AND HANDLEBAR” in chapter 7.
e. Install the rubber washer 3 .
f. Install the upper ring nut 2 .
g. Finger tighten the upper ring nut 2 , then
align the slots of both ring nuts. If necessary,
hold the lower ring nut and tighten the upper
ring nut until their slots are aligned.
h. Install the lock washer 1 .
NOTE:
Make sure that the lock washer tabs a sit correctly in the ring nut slots b .
5. Install:
upper bracket
steering stem nut
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
upper bracket pinch bolt
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
3-30
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK/
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
INSP
ADJ
EAS00149
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
2. Check:
inner tube
Damage/scratches Replace.
oil seal
Oil leakage Replace.
3. Hold the motorcycle upright and apply the
front brake.
4. Check:
operation
Push down hard on the handlebar several
times and check if the front fork rebounds
smoothly.
Unsmooth operation Repair.
Refer to “FRONT FORK” in chapter 7.
EAS00159
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
CAUTION:
Never go beyond the maximum or minimum
adjustment positions.
1. Adjust:
spring preload
3-31
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY/
CHECKING THE TIRES
INSP
ADJ
Ring nut wrench
1HX-28135-00
a. Turn the adjusting knob 1 in direction a or
b.
Direction a Spring preload is
increased
(suspension is harder).
Direction b Spring preload is
decreased
(suspension is softer).
Adjusting position
Standard: 3
Minimum: 1 (soft)
Maximum: 7 (hard)
EB304174
CHECKING THE TIRES
The following procedure applies to both of the
tires.
1. Measure:
tire pressure
Out of specification Regulate.
WARNING
The tire pressure should only be checked
and regulated when the tire temperature
equals the ambient air temperature.
The tire pressure and the suspension must
be adjusted according to the total weight
(including cargo, rider, passenger and accessories) and the anticipated riding
speed.
Operation of an overloaded motorcycle
could cause tire damage, an accident or an
injury.
NEVER OVERLOAD THE MOTORCYCLE.
3-32
CHECKING THE TIRES
INSP
ADJ
Basic
weight: (with 274 kg
oil and full
fuel tank)
Maximum
load*:
201 kg
Cold tire
pressure:
Front
Up to 90 kg
load*
200 kPa
225 kPa
(2.00 kgf/cm2) (2.25 kgf/cm2)
Rear
90 kg
225 kPa
250 kPa
maximum (2.25 kgf/cm2) (2.50 kgf/cm2)
load*
High speed
riding
*:
225 kPa
250 kPa
(2.25 kgf/cm2) (2,50 kgf/cm2)
total of cargo, rider, passenger and accessories
WARNING
It is dangerous to ride with a worn-out tire.
When the tire tread reaches the wear limit,
replace the tire immediately.
2. Check:
tire surfaces
Damage/wear Replace the tire.
Minimum tire tread depth
1.6 mm
1 Tire tread depth
2 Side wall
3 Wear indicator
WARNING
Do not use a tubeless tire on a wheel designed only for tube tires to avoid tire failure and personal injury from sudden deflation.
When using a tube tire, be sure to install the
correct tube.
Always replace a new tube tire and a new
tube as a set.
To avoid pinching the tube, make sure that
the wheel rim band and tube are centered in
the wheel groove.
3-33
INSP
ADJ
CHECKING THE TIRES
Patching a punctured tube is not recommended. If it is absolutely necessary to do
so, use great care and replace the tube as
soon as possible with a good quality replacement.
Tube wheel
Tubeless wheel
Tube tire only
Tube or tubeless tire
After extensive tests, the tires listed below
have been approved by Yamaha Motor Co.,
Ltd. for this model. Then front and rear tires
should always be by the same manufacturer and of the same design. No guarantee
concerning handling characteristics can
be given if a tire combination other than
one approved by Yamaha is used on this
motorcycle.
Front tire:
Manufacturer
Type
Size
BRIDGESTONE
110/90-18 61S EXEDRA L309
DUNLOP
110/90-18 61S
K555F
Type
Size
BRIDGESTONE
170/80-15
M/C 77S
EXEDRA
G546
DUNLOP
170/80-15
M/C 77S
K555
Rear tire:
Manufacturer
WARNING
New tires have a relatilvely low grip on the
road surface until they have been slightly
worn.
Therefor, approximately 100 km should be
traveled at normal speed before any highspeed riding is done.
3-34
CHECKING THE TIRES/
CHECKING AND TIGHTENING THE SPOKES
INSP
ADJ
NOTE:
For tires with a direction of rotation mark 1 :
Install the tire with the mark pointing in the
direction of wheel rotation.
Align the mark 2 with the valve installation
point.
EAS00169
CHECKING AND TIGHTENING THE SPOKES
The following procedure applies to all of the
spokes.
1. Check:
spoke 1
Bends/damage Replace.
Loose Tighten.
Tap the spokes with a screwdriver.
NOTE:
A tight spoke will emit a clear, ringing tone; a
loose spoke will sound flat.
2. Tighten:
3 Nm (0.3 mkg)
spoke
(with a spoke wrench 2 )
NOTE:
Be sure to tighten the spokes before and after
break-in.
3-35
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES /
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS / LUBRICATING
THE SIDESTAND/ LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION
INSP
ADJ
EAS00170
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE
CABLES
The following procedure applies to all of the
cable sheaths and cables.
WARNING
Damaged cable sheaths may causes the
cable to corrode and interfere with its movement. Replace damaged cable sheaths and
cables as soon as possible.
1. Check:
cable sheath
Damage Replace.
2. Check:
cable operation
Unsmooth operation Lubricate.
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil or a suitable cable
lubricant
NOTE:
Hold the cable end upright and pour a few drops
of lubricant into the cable sheath or use a suitable lubing device.
EAS00171
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS AND PEDALS
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal
moving parts of the levers and pedals.
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
EAS00172
LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal
moving parts of the sidestand.
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
EAS00174
LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal
moving parts of the rear suspension.
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide grease
3-36
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
INSP
ADJ
EB305020
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
WARNING
Batteries generate explosive hydrogen gas
and contain electrolyte which is made of poisonous and highly caustic sulfuric acid.
Therefore, always follow these preventive
measures:
Wear protective eye gear when handling or
working near batteries.
Charge batteries in a well-ventilated area.
Keep batteries away from fire, sparks or
open flames (e.g., welding equipment,
lighted cigarettes).
DO NOT SMOKE when charging or handling batteries.
KEEP BATTERIES AND ELECTROLYTE
OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
Avoid bodily contact with electrolyte as it
can cause severe burns or permanent eye
injury.
First aid in case of bodily contact:
External
SKIN – Wash with water.
EYES – Flush with water for 15 minutes and
get immediate medical attention.
Internal
Drink large quantities of water or milk followed with milk of magnesia, beaten egg or
WARNING
vegetable oil. Get immediate medical attention.
CAUTION:
This is a sealed battery. Never remove the
sealing caps because the balance between
cells will not be maintained and battery performance will deteriorate.
Charging time, charging amperage and
charging voltage for a MF battery are different from those of conventional batteries.
The MF battery should be charged as explained in the charging method illustrations. If the battery is overcharged, the
electrolyte level will drop considerably.
Therefore, take special care when charging
the battery.
3-37
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
INSP
ADJ
NOTE:
Since MF batteries are sealed, it is not possible
to check the charge state of the battery by measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte.
Therefore, the charge of the battery has to be
checked by measuring the voltage at the battery
terminals.
1. Remove:
S battery cover 1
2. Disconnect:
S battery leads
(from the battery terminals)
CAUTION:
First, disconnect the negative lead 1 , then
the positive lead 2 .
3. Remove:
S battery
4. Check:
S battery charge
a. Connect a pocket tester to the battery terminals.
Tester positive lead battery positive
terminal
Tester negative lead battery negative
terminal
Volt meter
NOTE:
S The charge state of a MF battery can be
checked by measuring its open-circuit voltage
(i.e., the voltage when the positive terminal is
disconnected).
S No charging is necessary when the open-circuit voltage equals or exceeds 12.8 V.
b. Check the charge of the battery, as shown in
the charts and the following example.
Example
c. Open-circuit voltage = 12.0 V
d. Charging time = 6.5 hours
e. Charge of the battery = 20 30 %
Open-circuit voltage
Relationship between open-circuit
voltage and charging time at 20_C
5. Charge:
S battery
(refer to the appropriate charging method illustration)
Charging time (Hours)
D This varies depending on the temperature, the state of
charge in battery plates and the electro lyte level.
3-38
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
WARNING
Open-circuit voltage (V)
Ambient
temperature 20_C
Do not quick charge a battery.
CAUTION:
_ Make sure that the battery breather hose
and battery vent are free of obstructions.
_ Never remove the MF battery sealing caps.
_ Do not use a high-rate battery charger.
They force a high-amperage current into
the battery quickly and can cause battery
overheating and battery plate damage.
_ If it is impossible to regulate the charging
current on the battery charger, be careful
not to overcharge the battery.
_ When charging a battery, be sure to remove
it from the motorcycle. (If charging has to
be done with the battery mounted on the
motorcycle, disconnect the negative lead
from the battery terminal.)
_ To reduce the chance of sparks, do not
plug in the battery charger until the battery
charger leads are connected to the battery.
_ Before removing the battery charger lead
clips from the battery terminals, be sure to
turn off the battery charger.
_ Make sure that the battery charger lead
clips are in full contact with the battery terminal and that they are not shorted. A corroded battery charger lead clip may generate heat in the contact area and a weak clip
spring may cause sparks.
_ If the battery becomes hot to the touch at
any time during the charging process, disconnect the battery charger and let the battery cool before reconnecting it. Hot batteries can explode!
_ As shown in the following illustration, the
open-circuit voltage of a MF battery stabilizes about 30 minutes after charging has
been completed. Therefore, wait 30 minutes after charging is completed before
measuring the open-circuit voltage.
Condition of charge in battery (%)
Charging
Open-circuit voltage (V)
INSP
ADJ
Ambient temperature
20_C
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60 Time (Minutes)
Check the Open-circuit
voltage
3-39
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
INSP
ADJ
Charging method using a variable-current (voltage) type charger
Charger
AMP meter
Measure the open-circuit
voltage prior to charging.
Connect a charger and
AMP meter to the battery
and start charging.
YES
Make sure the current is
higher than the standard
charging current written on
the battery.
NOTE:
Voltage should be measured 30 minutes after the machine is stopped.
NOTE:
Set the charging voltage at 16 17 V.
(If the setting is lower, charging will be
insufficient. If too high, the battery will
be over-charged.)
NO
By turning the charging voltage adjust dial, set the charging voltage at 20 25 V.
Adjust the voltage so that current is at standard charging
level.
YES
Monitor the amperage for 3 5 minutes to check if the standard charging current is
reached.
NO
Set the timer according to the
charging time suitable for the
open-circuit voltage.
Refer to “Battery condition
checking steps.”
If the current does
not exceed standard charging current after 5 minutes, replace the
battery.
In case that charging requires more than 5 hours, it is advisable to
check the charging current after a lapse of 5 hours. If there is any
charge in the amperage, readjust the voltage to obtain the standard
charging current.
Measure the battery open-circuit voltage after having left the battery
unused for more than 30 minutes.
12.8 V or more --- Charging is complete.
12.7 V or less --- Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V --- Replace the battery.
3-40
INSP
ADJ
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
Charging method using a constant-voltage type charger
Measure the open-circuit
voltage prior to charging.
NOTE:
Voltage should be measured 30 minutes after the machine is stopped.
Connect a charger and
AMP meter to the battery
and start charging.
YES
Make sure the current is
higher than the standard
charging current written on
the battery.
Charge the battery until the battery’s
charging voltage is 15 V.
NO
This type of battery charger cannot
charge the MF battery. A variable voltage charger is recommended.
NOTE:
Set the charging time at 20 hours (maximum).
Measure the battery open-circuit
voltage after having left the battery
unused for more than 30 minutes.
12.8 V or more --- Charging is complete.
12.7 V or less --- Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V --- Replace the battery.
Charger
AMP meter
Volt meter
Charging method using a constant-current type charger
This type of battery charger cannot charge the MF battery.
3-41
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
INSP
ADJ
6. Check:
battery breather hose and battery vent
Obstruction Clean.
Damage Replace.
7. Install:
battery
CAUTION:
When inspecting the battery, make sure
that the battery breather hose is properly
attached and routed correctly. If the battery
breather hose is positioned so as to allow
electrolyte or hydrogen gas from the battery to contact the frame, the motorcycle
and its finish may be damaged.
Make sure that the battery breather hose is
properly routed away from the drive chain
and from below the swingarm.
8. Connect:
battery leads
(to the battery terminals)
CAUTION:
First, connect the positive lead 1 , then the
negative lead 2 .
9. Check:
battery terminals
Dirt Clean with a wire brush.
Loose connection Connect properly.
10. Lubricate:
battery terminals
Recommended lubricant
Dielectric grease
11. Install:
battery cover
3-42
INSP
ADJ
CHECKING THE FUSES
EAS00181
CHECKING THE FUSES
The following procedure applies to all of the
fuses.
CAUTION:
To avoid a short circuit, always turn the main
switch to “OFF” when checking or replacing
a fuse.
1. Remove:
rider’s seat
ignitor plate
Refer to “FUEL TANK AND SEATS”.
tool box cover 1
2. Check:
fuse
a. Connect the pocket tester to the fuse and
check it for continuity.
NOTE:
Set the pocket tester selector to “Ω
1”.
Pocket tester
90890-03112
b. If the pocket tester indicates “∞”, replace the
fuse.
3. Replace:
blown fuse
a. Turn off the ignition.
b. Install a new fuse of the correct amperage
rating.
c. Turn on the switches to verify if the electrical
circuit is operational.
d. If the fuse immediately blows again, check
the electrical circuit.
Amperage rating
Quantity
Main
30A
1
Headlight
15A
1
Carburetor
heater
15A
1
Signals
10A
1
Ignition
10A
1
Back up
5A
1
Reserve
30A
1
Reserve
15A
1
Reserve
10A
1
Reserve
5A
1
Fuses
3-43
CHECKING THE FUSES/
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB
INSP
ADJ
WARNING
Never use a fuse with an amperage rating
other than that specified. Improvising or using a fuse with the wrong amperage rating
may cause extensive damage to the electrical system, cause the lighting and ignition
systems to malfunction and could possibly
cause a fire.
4. Install:
tool box cover
ignitor plate
rider’s seat
EAS00182
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB
1. Disconnect:
connectors 1
2. Remove
headlight bulb cover 2
3. Remove:
headlight bulb holder 1
4. Remove:
headlight bulb 2
WARNING
Since the headlight bulb gets extremely hot,
keep flammable products and your hands
away from the bulb until it has cooled down.
5. Install:
headlight bulb (New)
Secure the new headlight bulb with the headlight bulb holder.
3-44
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB/
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM
INSP
ADJ
CAUTION:
Avoid touching the glass part of the headlight bulb to keep it free from oil, otherwise
the transparency of the glass, the life of the
bulb and the luminous flux will be adversely
affected. If the headlight bulb gets soiled,
thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened
with alcohol or lacquer thinner.
5. Install:
headlight bulb holder
6. Install:
headlight bulb cover
7. Connect:
leads
EAS00184
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM
1. Adjust:
headlight beam (vertically)
a. Turn the adjusting screw 1 in direction a or
b.
Direction a Headlight beam is raised.
Direction b Headlight beam is
lowered.
2. Adjust:
headlight beam (horizontally)
a. Turn the adjusting knob 2 in direction a or
b.
Direction a Headlight beam moves to
the right.
Direction b Headlight beam moves to
the left.
3-45
ENG
4
ENG
CHAPTER 4
ENGINE
ENGINE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUFFLERS, BRAKE PEDAL AND SIDE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEADS, SHIFT PEDAL AND CLUTCH CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE MOUNTING BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-3
4-4
4-5
CYLINDER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRONT CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
4-6
4-8
4-10
4-12
4-13
4-13
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND ROCKER ARM
SHAFTRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER ARMS . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
4-17
4-17
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE GUIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-24
4-26
4-26
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE PISTON PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE PISTONS AND CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-31
4-32
4-32
TIMING GEARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE TIMING DRIVE GEARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAINS, CAMSHAFT
SPROCKETS AND TIMING GUIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE TIMING DRIVE GEARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
4-35
4-18
4-19
4-35
4-36
4-36
ENG
CLUCTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PUSH RODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRING AND CLUTCH SPRING
SEAT PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38
4-38
4-40
4-42
4-42
4-43
4-43
4-43
4-44
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STATOR COIL AND PICKUP COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-47
4-47
4-48
4-49
4-50
4-51
SHIFT SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE SHIFT SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-53
4-54
4-54
4-54
OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE OIL DELIVERY PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-55
4-57
4-57
4-57
4-58
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRANKCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE CONNECTING RODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS . . . .
CHECKING THE BEARING AND OIL SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-59
4-59
4-60
4-61
4-62
4-62
4-62
4-65
4-65
4-66
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-68
4-69
4-69
4-70
4-71
4-44
4-44
4-45
ENG
MIDDLE GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDDLE DRIVE PINION GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDDLE DRIVEN PINION GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . .
DISASSEMBLING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY . . . . .
REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . .
ASSEMBLING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . .
ASSEMBLING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE MIDDLE GEAR ASSEMBLY AND
ADJUSTING THE BACKLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE UNIVERSAL JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIGNING THE MIDDLE GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-72
4-72
4-73
4-75
4-75
4-76
4-76
4-76
4-77
4-78
4-78
4-80
4-81
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG
ENGINE
ENGINE REMOVAL
MUFFLERS, BRAKE PEDAL AND SIDE COVER
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
64 Nm (6.4 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
25 Nm (2.5 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Removing the muffler, brake pedal
and side cover
Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so
there is no danger of it falling over.
Refer & “FUEL TANK AND SEATS” in
Chapter 3.
Fuel tank
1
2
3
4
5
6
Air filter case assembly
Carburetor assembly
Muffler assembly
Cover (emblem)
Reservoir tank
Exhaust pipes
Rear brake switch lead
Footrest/brake pedal
Refer to “CARBURETOR” in Chapter 5.
1
1
1
2
1
1/1
4-1
Disconnect
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
64 Nm (6.4 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
25 Nm (2.5 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
7
8
9
Rear brake master cylinder/bracket
Battery cover
Battery leads
10
11
12
13
Right side cover
Starter motor
Cylinder head covers
Spark plug caps
Q’ty
1/1
1
2
1
1
4
4
Remarks
Disconnect
NOTE:
First, disconnect the negative lead, then
disconnect the positive lead.
Disconnect
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure
4-2
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG
LEADS, SHIFT PEDL AND CLUTCH CABLE
64 Nm (6.4 mkg)
64 Nm (6.4 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Removing the leads, shift pedal and
clutch cable
1
Tool box cover
1
Left side cover
1/1/1 Disconnect
AC magneto lead/pickup lead/side
stand switch lead/speed sensor lead
Disconnect
1
Neutral switch lead
1/1 Refer to “INSTALLING THE ENGINE”.
Footrest/shift pedal
1
Sidestand
1
Clutch adjusting cover
Disconnect
1
Clutch cable
1
Speed sensor
2
Fuel tank fitting knobs
2
Steering head side covers
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-3
ENGINE REMOVAL
ENG
ENGINE MOUNTING BOLTS
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
74 Nm (7.4 mkg)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order below.
Place a suitable stand under the frame and
engine.
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”
Refer to “REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
AND SWINGARM” in Chapter 6.
Engine mounting bolt removal
Left crankcase cover
Tool box
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Remarks
1
1
1
1
4
2
1
1/1
1
Horn
Engine ground lead connector
Engine stay (front-lower)
Down tube
Engine bracket bolts
Engine mount bolts (rear upper)
Engine mount bolt (rear lower)
Engine stays (rear upper/lower)
Engine assembly
Refer to “INSTALLING THE ENGINE”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-4
ENGINE
ENG
EAS00192
INSTALLING THE ENGINE
1. Tighten the bolts in the following order.
Bolt 1 :
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Bolt 2 :
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Bolt 3 :
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Bolt 4 :
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Bolt 5 :
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
2. Install:
shift arm 1
NOTE:
Align the punch mark a in the shift shaft with
the slot in the shift arm.
Adjust the adjusting bolt length b .
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE SHIFT PEDAL” in
chapter 3.
Shift arm bolt
10Nm (1.0mkg)
Adjusting bolt length
114.7mm
4-5
CYLINDER HEADS
ENG
CYLINDER HEADS
REAR CYLINDER HEAD
50 Nm (5.0 mkg)
35 Nm (3.5 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
55 Nm (5.5 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”.
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
Cylinder head removal
Engine assembly
Left crankcase cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Remarks
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
2
1/1
1
Tappet cover (exhaust)/O-ring
Tappet cover (intake)/O-ring
Exhaust pipe joint/gasket
Carburetor joint/O-ring
Oil delivery pipes
Camshaft sprocket cover/O-ring
Camshaft sprocket bolt
4-6
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CYLINDER
HEADS”.
CYLINDER HEADS
50 Nm (5.0 mkg)
ENG
35 Nm (3.5 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
55 Nm (5.5 mkg)
Order
8
9
10
11
12
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Timing chain tensioner/gasket
Camshaft sprocket
Cylinder head
Dowel pins
Cylinder head gasket
1/1
1
1
2
1
4-7
Remarks
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE
CYLINDER HEADS”.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CYLINDER
HEADS”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
ENG
CYLINDER HEADS
FRONT CYLINDER HEAD
35 Nm (3.5 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
50 Nm (5.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
55 Nm (5.5 mkg)
New
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”.
Refer to “REAR CYLINDER HEAD”.
Refer to “CLUTCH”.
Cylinder head removal
Engine assembly
Oil delivery pipes
Right crankcase cover
Tappet cover (exhaust)/O-ring
Tappet cover (intake)/O-ring
Carburetor joint/O-ring
Camshaft sprocket cover/O-ring
Baffle plate/O-ring
Camshaft sprocket bolt
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
1
4-8
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CYLINDER
HEADS”.
ENG
CYLINDER HEADS
35 Nm (3.5 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
50 Nm (5.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
55 Nm (5.5 mkg)
New
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
7
8
9
10
11
12
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Timing chain tensioner/gasket
Camshaft sprocket plate
Camshaft sprocket
Cylinder head
Dowel pins
Cylinder head gasket
1/1
1
1
1
2
1
4-9
Remarks
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE CYLINDER HEADS”.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CYLINDER
HEADS”.
For installationreverse the removal
procedure.
CYLINDER HEADS
ENG
EAS00226
REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEADS
Rear cylinder head
1. Remove:
camshaft sprocket cover
tappet covers
2. Align:
“T” mark a (with the stationary pointer b )
a. Temporarily install the left crankcase cover
without the pickup coil and stator coil.
b. Turn the crankshaft clockwise.
c. Align the “T” mark a with the stationary
pointer b on the crankcase cover (left) when
the rear piston is at TDC on the compression
stroke.
d. Check that the rear piston is at TDC in the
compression stroke.
e. The rear piston is at TDC on the compression
stroke when there is clearance at both of the
rocker arms. If there is no clearance then turn
the crankshaft clockwise one full turn.
f. When to “T” mark is aligned with the stationary pointer the punch mark c on the camshaft sprocket should be aligned with the stationary pointer d on the cylinder head.
3. Loosen:
bolt (camshaft sprocket) 1
NOTE:
Use the sheave holder 2 to hold the rotor.
Sheave holder:
90890-01701
4-10
CYLINDER HEADS
ENG
4. Remove:
_ timing chain tensioner
_ gasket
5. Remove:
_ bolt (camshaft sprocket) 1
_ camshaft sprocket 2
NOTE:
To prevent the timing chain from falling into the
crankcase fasten a wire to it.
6. Remove:
_ cylinder head
NOTE:
_ Loosen the bolts and nuts in the proper sequence.
_ Follow the numerical order shown in the illustration. Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a
time until all of the bolts are loose.
Front cylinder head
NOTE:
When removing the front cylinder head, repeat
the rear cylinder head removal procedures.
However, note the following points.
1. Align:
_ “I” mark
(with the stationary pointer)
Removal steps:
_ Turn the crankshaft clockwise 290_.
_ Align the “I” mark a with the stationary pointer
b on the crankcase cover (left) when the front
piston is at TDC on the compression stroke.
_ When the “I” mark is aligned with the stationary
pointer the punch mark c on the camshaft
sprocket should be aligned with the stationary
pointer d on the cylinder head.
_ The front piston is at TDC on the compression
stroke when there is clearance at both of the
rocker arms.
4-11
CYLINDER HEADS
ENG
EAS00228
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEADS
The following procedure applies to all of the cylinder heads.
1. Eliminate:
combustion chamber carbon deposits
(with a rounded scraper)
NOTE:
Do not use a sharp instrument to avoid damaging or scratching:
spark plug threads
valve seats
2. Check:
cylinder head
Damage/scratches Replace.
3. Measure:
cylinder head warpage
Out of specification Resurface the cylinder head.
Cylinder head warpage
Less than 0.03 mm
a. Place a straightedge 1 and a thickness
gauge 2 across the cylinder head.
b. Measure the warpage.
c. If the limited is exceeded, resurface the cylinder head as follows.
d. Place 400 – 600 grit wet sandpaper on the
surface plate and resurface the cylinder
head using a figure-eight sanding pattern.
NOTE:
To ensure an even surface, rotate the cylinder
head several times.
4-12
CYLINDER HEADS
ENG
EB401430
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER
1. Check:
timing chain tensioner
Cracks/damage/rough movement Replace.
a. Lightly press the timing chain tensioner rod
into the timing chain tensioner housing by
hand.
NOTE:
While pressing the timing chain tensioner rod,
wind it clockwise with a thin screwdriver 1 until
it stops.
b. Remove the screwdriver and slowly release
the timing chain tensioner rod.
c. Make sure that the timing chain tensioner rod
comes out of the timing chain tensioner
housing smoothly. If there is rough movement, replace the timing chain tensioner.
EAS00234
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEADS
Rear cylinder head
1. Install:
dowel pins
gasket
NOTE:
The “5EL” mark on the gasket must face up side
of the cylinder.
2. Install:
nuts (cylinder head) (M12: 1 – 4)
50 Nm (5.0 mkg)
cap nut (cylinder head) (M10: 5)
35 Nm (3.5 mkg)
bolts (cylinder head) (M8: 6 – 7)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
NOTE:
Tighten the bolts and nuts in the proper sequence.
Follow the numerical order shown in the illustration. Tighten the bolts and nuts in two
stages.
4-13
CYLINDER HEADS
ENG
3. Install:
camshaft sprocket
a. Temporarily install the rotor nut and left
crankcase cover without the pickup coil and
stator coil.
b. Turn the crankshaft clockwise.
c. Align the “T” mark a with the stationary
pointer b on the crankcase cover (left).
d. Install the camshaft sprocket with the timing
mark c facing out.
e. Turn the camshaft just enough to remove any
slack from the intake side of the timing chain.
f. Insert your finger into the hole and timing
chain tensioner hole and push the timing
chain guide inward.
g. While pushing the timing chain guide, be
sure that the timing mark c and the stationary pointer d are properly aligned at TDC.
4. Install:
timing chain tensioner
a. Lightly press the timing chain tensioner rod
into the timing chain tensioner housing by
hand.
b. While pressing the timing chain tensioner
rod, wind it clockwise with a thin screwdriver
1 until it stops.
c. With the screwdriver still inserted into the
timing chain tensioner, install the timing
chain tensioner 2 , and gasket.
Then, tighten the timing chain tensioner bolts
3 to the specified torque.
WARNING
Always use a new gasket.
NOTE:
The “UP” mark on the timing chain tensioner
should face up.
Timing chain tensioner bolt
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
4-14
CYLINDER HEADS
ENG
d. Remove the screwdriver, make sure that the
timing chain tensioner rod releases, and
tighten the cap bolt to the specified torque.
Cap bolt
8 Nm (0.8 m_kg)
5. Install:
_ bolt (camshaft sprocket) 1
55 Nm (5.5 m_kg)
NOTE:
_ Be sure the projection on the camshaft sprocket plate is aligned with the hole in the sprocket.
_ Use the sheave holder 2 to hold the rotor.
Sheave holder:
90890-01701
6. Check:
_ alignment marks
If the marks do not align Adjust.
7. Measure:
_ valve clearance
Out of specification Adjust.
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE” in CHAPTER 3.
Front cylinder head
NOTE:
When installing the front cylinder head, repeat
the rear cylinder head installation procedure.
However, note the following points.
1. Install:
_ camshaft sprocket
a. Turn the crankshaft clockwise 290_.
b. Align the “I” mark a with the stationary pointer b on the crankcase cover (left).
c. Install the camshaft sprocket with the timing
mark c facing out.
d. Turn the camshaft just enough to remove any
slack from the intake side of the timing chain.
e. Insert your finger into the hole and timing
chain tensioner hole and push the timing
chain guide inward.
f. While pushing the timing chain guide, be
sure that the timing mark c and the stationary pointer d are properly aligned at TDC.
4-15
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
ENG
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
37.5 Nm (3.75 mkg)
27 Nm (2.7 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Job name/Part name
Removing the rocker arm and
camshaft
Cylinder heads
Stopper plate
Camshaft bushing
Camshaft/dowel pin
Union bolt/gasket
Rocker arm shafts
Rocker arms
Locknuts
Valve adjusters
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD”.
1
1
1/1
1/1
2
2
2
2
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE
ROCKER ARM AND CAMSHAFT”.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE
ROCKER ARM AND CAMSHAFT”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-16
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
ENG
EAS00202
REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
1. Remove:
rocker arm shafts (intake and exhaust) 1
rocker arms 2
NOTE:
Use a slide hammer 3 and weight 4 to remove
the rocker arm shafts.
Slide hammer bolt (M8):
90890-01085
Weight:
90890-01084
2. Remove:
camshaft bushing 1
camshaft 2
NOTE:
Screw a 10 mm bolt 3 into the threaded end of
the camshaft and pull out the camshaft.
EAS00205
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFTS
1. Check:
camshaft bushings
Damage/wear Replace.
2. Check:
camshaft lobes
Blue discoloration/pitting/scratches Replace the camshaft.
3. Measure:
camshaft lobe dimensions a and b
Out of specification Replace the camshaft.
Camshaft lobe dimension limit
Intake
a 39.012 mm
b #1: 31.993 mm
#2: 32.027 mm
Exhaust
a 39.045 mm
b 32.100 mm
4. Check:
camshaft oil passage
Obstruction Blow out with compressed air.
4-17
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFTS
ENG
EB401410
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND
ROCKER ARM SHAFTS
The following procedure applies to all of the
rocker arms and rocker arm shafts.
1. Check:
rocker arm
Damage/wear Replace.
rocker arm lobe 1
valve adjuster 2
Excessive wear Replace.
2. Check:
rocker arm shaft
Blue
discoloration/excessive
wear/pitting/scratches Replace or check the lubrication system.
3. Measure:
rocker arm inside diameter a
Out of specification Replace.
Rocker arm inside diameter
14.036 mm
4. Measure:
rocker arm shaft outside diameter b
Out of specification Replace.
Rocker arm shaft outside diameter
13.95 mm
5. Calculate:
rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft clearance
NOTE:
Calculate the clearance by subtracting the rocker arm shaft outside diameter from the rocker
arm inside diameter.
Above 0.086 mm Replace the defective
part(-s).
Rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft
clearance
0.009 0.033 mm
<Limit> : 0.086 mm
4-18
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFTS
ENG
EAS00220
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER ARMS
1. Lubricate:
camshaft
Recommended lubricant
Camshaft/Bushing
Molybdenum disulfide oil
2. Install:
camshaft 1
camshaft bushing 2
NOTE:
The dowel pin a on the end of the camshaft
must align with the timing mark b on the cylinder head.
Make sure that the No.1 camshaft 3 is
installed in the rear cylinder head and the No.2
camshaft 4 is installed in the front cylinder
head.
3. Install:
stopper plate 1
Stopper plate bolt 2
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
4. Lubricate:
rocker arm shafts
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
4-19
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFTS
ENG
5. Install:
rocker arms
rocker arm shafts
NOTE:
Make sure that the rocker arm shafts is completely pushed into the cylinder head.
4-20
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Removing the valves and valve
springs.
Cylinder heads
Rocker arms and camshafts
1
Valve cotters
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
Valve spring retainers
Valve springs
Valve (intake)
Valve (exhaust)
Valve stem seals
Valve spring seats
2
2
1
1
2
2
Refer to “CYLINDER HEADS”.
Refer to “ROCKER ARMS AND
CAMSHAFT”.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE VALVES”.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE VALVES”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-21
VALVE AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
EAS00237
REMOVING THE VALVES
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves and related components.
NOTE:
Before removing the internal parts of the cylinder head (e.g., valves, valve springs, valve
seats), make sure that the valves properly seal.
1. Check:
valve sealing
Leakage at the valve seat Check the valve
face, valve seat, and valve seat width.
Refer to “CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS”.
a. Pour a clean solvent 1 into the intake and
exhaust ports.
b. Check that the valves properly seal.
There should be no leakage at the valve seat
2.
2. Remove:
valve cotters
NOTE:
Remove the valve cotters by compressing the
valve spring with the valve spring compressor
1.
Valve spring compressor
90890-04019
EAS00239
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE GUIDES
The following procedure applies to all of the
valve and valve guides.
1. Measure:
valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance =
Valve guide inside diameter a –
Valve stem diameter b
4-22
VALVE AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
Out of specification Replace the valve
guide.
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide
clearance
Intake 0.010 0.037 mm
<Limit>: 0.08 mm
Exhaust 0.025 0.052 mm
<Limit>: 0.10 mm
2. Replace.
_ valve guide
NOTE:
To ease valve guide removal and installation,
and to maintain the correct fit, heat the cylinder
head to 100_C (212_K) in an oven.
a. Remove the valve guide with a valve guide
remover 1 .
b. Install the new valve guide with a valve guide
installer 2 and valve guide remover 1 .
c. After installing the valve guide, bore the
valve guide with a valve guide reamer 3 to
obtain the proper valve-stem-to-valve-guide
clearance.
NOTE:
After replacing the valve guide, reface the valve
seat.
Valve guide remover and installer
(8 mm)
90890-04014
3. Eliminate:
_ carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
4. Check:
_ valve face
Pitting/wear Grind the valve face.
_ valve stem end
Mushroom shape or diameter larger than the
body of the valve stem Replace the valve.
4-23
VALVE AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
5. Measure:
valve margin thickness a
Out of specification Replace the valve.
Valve margin thickness limit
0.8 mm
6. Measure:
valve stem runout
Out of specification Replace the valve.
NOTE:
When installing a new valve, always replace
the valve guide.
If the valve is removed or replaced, always replace the valve stem seal.
Valve stem runout
0.03 mm
EAS00240
CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves and valve seats.
1. Eliminate:
carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
2. Check:
valve seat
Pitting/wear Replace the cylinder head.
3. Measure:
valve seat width a
Out of specification Replace the cylinder
head.
Valve seat width limit
Intake: 1.8 mm
Exhaust: 1.8 mm
a. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) b
onto the valve face.
b. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
c. Press the valve through the valve guide and
onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern.
d. Measure the valve seat width. Where the
valve seat and valve face contacted one
another, the blueing will have been removed.
4-24
VALVE AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
4. Lap:
valve face
valve seat
NOTE:
After replacing the cylinder head or replacing
the valve and valve guide, the valve seat and
valve face should be lapped.
a. Apply a coarse lapping compound to the
valve face.
CAUTION:
Do not let the lapping compound enter the
gap between the valve stem and the valve
guide.
b. Apply molybdenum disulfide oil onto the
valve stem.
c. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
d. Turn the valve until the valve face and valve
seat are evenly polished, then clean off all of
the lapping compound.
NOTE:
For the best lapping results, lightly tap the valve
seat while rotating the valve back and forth between your hand.
e. Apply a fine lapping compound to the valve
face and repeat the above steps.
f. After every lapping procedure, be sure to
clean off all of the lapping compound from
the valve face and valve seat.
g. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) onto
the valve face.
h. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
i. Press the valve through the valve guide and
onto the valve seat to make a clear impression.
j. Measure the valve seat width again. If the
valve seat width is out of specification, reface
and lap the valve seat.
4-25
VALVE AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
EAS00241
CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS
The following procedure applies to all of the
valve springs.
1. Measure:
_ valve spring free length a
Out of specification Replace the valve
spring.
Valve spring free length (intake
and exhaust)
44.6 mm
<Limit>: 43.5 mm
2. Measure:
_ compressed spring force a
Out of specification Replace the valve
spring.
b Installed length
Compressed spring force
Intake and exhaust spring
160.7 N (16.4 kg) at 40 mm
3. Measure:
_ valve spring tilt c
Out of specification Replace the valve
spring.
Spring tilt limit
Intake and exhaust valve spring
2.5_/1.9 mm
EAS00245
INSTALLING THE VALVES
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves and related components.
1. Deburr:
_ valve stem end
(with an oil stone)
2. Lubricate:
_ valve stem
_ oil seal New
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide oil
3. Install:
_ valve
_ lower spring seat
_ oil seal New
_ valve spring
_ upper spring seat
(into the cylinder head)
4-26
VALVE AND VALVE SPRINGS
ENG
NOTE:
Install the valve spring with the larger pitch a
facing up.
b Smaller pitch
4. Install:
valve cotters
NOTE:
Install the valve cotters by compressing the valve
spring with the valve spring compressor 1 .
Valve spring compressor
90890-04019
5. To secure the valve cotters onto the valve
stem, lightly tap the valve tip with a soft-face
hammer.
CAUTION:
Hitting the valve tip with excessive force
could damage the valve.
4-27
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS
ENG
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
1
Removing the cylinders and pistons
Cylinder heads
Timing chain guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cylinder
Dowel pins
Cylinder gasket
Piston pin clips
Piston pin
Piston
Piston ring set
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “CYLINDER HEADS”.
The “5EL” mark should face towards the
cylinder head.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE PISTONS
AND CYLINDERS”.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONS”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-28
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS
ENG
EAS00254
REMOVING THE PISTONS
The following procedure applies to all of the pistons.
1. Remove:
piston pin clip 1
piston pin 2
piston 3
CAUTION:
Do not use a hammer to drive the piston pin
out.
NOTE:
Before removing the piston pin clip, cover the
crankcase opening with a clean rag to prevent
the piston pin clip from falling into the crankcase.
For reference during installation, put an identification mark on each piston crown.
Before removing the piston pin, deburr the piston pin clip’s groove and the piston’s pin bore
area. If both areas are deburred and the piston
pin is still difficult to remove, remove it with the
piston pin puller 4 .
Piston pin puller
90890-01304
2. Remove:
top ring
2nd ring
oil ring
NOTE:
When removing a piston ring, open the end gap
with your fingers and lift the other side of the ring
over the piston crown.
EB404405
CHECKING THE CYLINDERS AND PISTONS
The following procedure applies to all of the cylinders and pistons.
1. Check:
piston wall
cylinder wall
Vertical scratches Rebore or replace the
cylinder, and replace the piston and piston
rings as a set.
4-29
ENG
CYLINDER AND PISTONS
2. Measure:
piston-to-cylinder clearance
a. Measure cylinder bore “C” with the cylinder
bore gauge.
a 40 mm from the top of the cylinder
NOTE:
Measure cylinder bore “C” by taking side-toside and front-to-back measurements of the cylinder. Then, find the average of the measurements.
Cylinder
bore C:
Standard
Wear
limit
95.00 95.01 mm
95.1 mm
C=
X+Y
2
b. If out of specification, rebore or replace the
cylinder, and replace the piston and piston
rings as a set.
c. Measure piston skirt diameter “P” with the
micrometer.
b 5 mm from the bottom edge of the piston.
Piston size P
Standard
94.960 94.975 mm
d. If out of specification, replace the piston and
piston rings as a set.
e. Calculate the piston-to-cylinder clearance
with the following formula.
Piston-to-cylinder clearance =
Cylinder bore “C” –
Piston skirt diameter “P”
Piston-to-cylinder clearance
0.025 0.050 mm
<Limit>: 0.15 mm
f. If out of specification, replace the cylinder, and
replace the piston and piston rings as a set.
4-30
CYLINDER AND PISTONS
ENG
EB404410
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS
1. Measure:
piston ring side clearance
Out of specification Replace the piston
and piston rings as a set.
NOTE:
Before measuring the piston ring side clearance, eliminate any carbon deposits from the
piston ring grooves and piston rings.
Piston ring side clearance
Top ring
0.04 0.08 mm
<Limit>: 0.1 mm
2nd ring
0.03 0.07 mm
<Limit>: 0.1 mm
2. Install:
piston ring
(into the cylinder)
NOTE:
Using the piston crown pash the ring into the cylinder so that the ring will be at a right angle to the
cylinder bore.
a 40 mm from the top of the cylinder
3. Measure:
piston ring end gap
Out of specification Replace the piston ring.
NOTE:
The oil ring expander spacer’s end gap cannot
be measured. If the oil ring rail’s gap is excessive, replace all three piston rings.
Piston ring end gap
Top ring
0.3 0.5 mm
<Limit>: 0.8 mm
2nd ring
0.3 0.45 mm
<Limit>: 0.8 mm
Oil ring
0.2 0.7 mm
4-31
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS
ENG
EAS00266
CHECKING THE PISTON PINS
The following procedure applies to all of the piston pins.
1. CHECK:
piston pin
Blue discoloration/grooves ! Replace, then
inspect the lubrication system.
2. Measure:
piston pin outside diameter a
Out of specification ! Replace the piston pin.
Piston pin outside diameter
21.991 22.000 mm
3. Measure:
piston pin bore inside diameter b
Out of specification ! Replace the piston
Piston pin bore inside diameter
22.004 22.015 mm
4. Calculate:
piston-pin-to-piston clearance
Out of specification ! Replace the piston pin.
Piston-pin-to-piston clearance =
Piston pin bore size b –
Piston pin outside diameter a
Piston-pin-to-piston clearance
0.004 0.024 mm
EB404701
INSTALLING THE PISTONS AND CYLINDERS
The following procedure applies to all of the pistons and cylinders.
1. Install:
oil ring expander
lower oil ring rail
upper oil ring rail
2nd ring
top ring
NOTE:
Be sure to install the piston rings so that the
manufacuturer’s marks or numbers face up.
4-32
CYLINDERS AND PISTONS
ENG
2. Install:
piston 1
piston pin 2
piston pin clip (New) 3
NOTE:
Apply engine oil onto the piston pin.
Make sure that the “EX” mark a on the piston
faces towards the exhaust side of the engine.
Before installing the piston pin clip, cover the
crankcase opening with a clean rag to prevent
the clip from falling into the crankcase.
3. Install:
gasket (New)
dowel pins
4. Lubricate:
piston
piston rings
cylinder
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
5. Offset:
piston ring end gaps
a Top ring
b Lower oil ring rail
c Upper oil ring rail
d 2nd ring
6. Install:
cylinder
NOTE:
While compressing the piston rings with one
hand, install the cylinder with the other hand.
Pass the timing chain and timing chain guide
(exhaust side) through the timing chain cavity.
Cylinder bolt
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
4-33
TIMING GEARS
ENG
TIMING GEARS
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Job name/Part name
Removing the timing gears
Cylinder heads
Cylinders
Clutch assembly
Primary drive gear nut
Timing drive gear
Dowel pins
Springs
Timing chain drive gear shaft
Timing chain drive gear sprocket/
Timing chain
Primary drive gear
Straight key
Timing chain guide
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD”.
Refer to “CYLINDERS AND PISTONS”.
Refer to “CLUTCH”.
1
1
6
6
1
1/1
1
1
1
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE TIMING DRIVE GEARS”.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE TIMING
DRIVE GEARS”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-34
TIMING GEARS
ENG
REMOVING THE TIMING DRIVE GEAR
Front cylinder
1. Straighten the lock washer tab.
2. Remove:
primary drive gear nut 1
NOTE:
While holding the generator rotor with the
sheave holder, loosen the primary drive gear
nut.
3. Remove:
timing drive gear 2
dowel pins
springs
NOTE:
When removing the timing drive gear, the dowel
pins and springs are scatter and dropping down.
Do not missing them.
Rear cylinder
NOTE:
When removing the rear cylinder timing gear,
repeat the front cylinder timing gear removal
procedure. However, note the following points.
1. Remove:
rotor assembly
dowel pins
springs
timing drive gear
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
EB401422
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAINS, CAMSHAFT
SPROCKETS, AND TIMING CHAIN GUIDES
The following procedure applies to all of the timing chains, camshaft sprockets, and timing
chain guides.
1. Check:
timing chain 1
Damage/sitffness Replace the timing chain
and its respective camshaft sprockets as a set.
2. Check:
camshaft sprocket
Damage/wear Replace the respective
camshaft sprockets and the respective timing chain as a set.
3. Check:
timing chain guide (exhaust side) 1
timing chain guide (intake side) 2
Damage/wear Replace the defective
part(-s).
4-35
TIMING GEARS
ENG
EAS00292
CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVE
1. Check:
primary drive gear
primary driven gear
Damage/wear Replace the primary drive
and primary driven gears as a set.
Excessive noise during operation Replace the primary drive and primary driven
gears as a set.
2. Check:
primary-drive-gear-to-primary-driven-gear
free play
Free play exists Replace the primary drive
and primary driven gears as a set.
INSTALLING THE TIMING DRIVE GEARS
1. Install:
timing chain
(onto the timing chain drive gear sprocket)
NOTE:
To prevent the timing chain from falling into the
crankcase, fasten it with a wire.
2. Install:
timing chain drive gear sprocket
timing chain drive gear shaft
NOTE:
Make sure that the “2” mark on the timing chain
drive gear sprocket is installed in the rear cylinder and the “3” mark on the timing chain drive
gear sprocket is installed in the front cylinder.
3. Install:
stopper plate 1
stopper plate bolt
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
NOTE:
Turn the timing chain drive gear shaft so that the
stopper plate fits correctly into the slot and then
fasten the stopper plate with the bolt.
4-36
TIMING GEARS
ENG
Front cylinder
1. Install:
(Front cylinder)
springs 1
dowel pins
timing drive gear 2
NOTE:
Insert the suitable pin 3 into the hole of timing
chain drive gear sprocket and match the gear
teeth.
Push the projections a on the timing drive
gear into the spaces b .
Align the punch mark c on the timing drive
gear, the punch mark d on the timing chain
drive gear sprocket and the key posision e as
shown.
2. Install:
claw washer
lock washer 1 New
primary drive gear nut 2
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
NOTE:
While holding the generator retor with the sheave
holder, tighten the primary drive gear nut.
3. Bend the lock washer tab along a flat side of
the nut.
Rear cylinder
NOTE:
When installing the rear cylinder timing gear, repeat the front cylinder timing gear installation
procedure. However, note the following points.
1. Install:
springs
dowel pins
timing drive gear
rotor assembly
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
4-37
CLUTCH
ENG
CLUTCH
RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER
New
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Removing the right clutch cover
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so
there is no danger of it falling over.
Refer to “ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT”
in CHAPTER 3.
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
Muffler assembly
Exhaust pipes
Brake pedal/Footrest
Rear brake master cylinder/bracket
Oil filter cover plate
Oil filter cover
O-rings
Oil filter
Right crankcase cover
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”.
1
1
3
1
1
4-38
CLUTCH
ENG
New
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
6
7
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Dowel pins
Crankcase cover gasket
Remarks
2
1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-39
CLUTCH
ENG
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
70 Nm (7.0 mkg)
8 Nm (0.8 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Job name/Part name
Removing the clutch
Clutch spring bolts
Clutch spring plate
Clutch spring
Clutch spring seat
Clutch pressure plate
Bearing/shart clutch push rod
Friction plates
Clutch plates
Wire circlip
Clutch plate
Damper
Clutch damper plate
Nut/lock washer
Clutch boss
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
6
1
1
1
1
1/1
6
5
1
1
1
1
1/1
1
4-40
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CLUTCH”.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE CLUTCH.”
CLUTCH
ENG
70 Nm (7.0 mkg)
8 Nm (0.8 mkg)
Order
15
16
17
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Thrust washer
Clutch housing
Long clutch push rod
Remarks
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-41
CLUTCH
ENG
EAS00278
REMOVING THE CLUTCH
1. Straighten the lock washer tab.
2. Loosen:
clutch boss nut 1
NOTE:
While holding the clutch boss 2 with the clutch
holding tool 3 , loosen the clutch boss nut.
Clutch holding tool
90890-04086
3. Remove:
clutch boss nut 1
lock washer 2
clutch boss 3
NOTE:
There is a built-in damper between the clutch
boss 3 and the clutch plate 4 . It is not necessary to remove the wire circlip 5 and disassemble the built-in damper unless there is serious clutch chattering.
EAS00281
CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATES
The following procedure applies to all of the friction plates.
1. Check:
friction plate
Damage/wear Replace the friction plates
as a set.
2. Measure:
friction plate thickness
Out of specification Replace the friction
plates as a set.
NOTE:
Measure the friction plate at four places.
Friction plate thickness
2.9 3.1 mm
<Limit>: 2.8 mm
4-42
CLUTCH
ENG
EAS00286
CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE
1. Check:
pressure plate
Cracks/damage Replace.
bearing
Damage/wear Replace.
EAS00285
CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS
1. Check:
clutch boss splines
Damage/pitting/wear Replace the clutch
boss.
NOTE:
Pitting on the clutch boss splines will cause erratic clutch operation.
EAS00288
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PUSH RODS
1. Check:
short clutch push rod 1
long clutch push rod 2
Cracks/damage/wear Replace the defective part(-s).
2. Measure:
long clutch push rod bending limit
Out of specification Replace the long
clutch push rod.
Long clutch push rod bending
limit
0.5 mm
4-43
CLUTCH
ENG
EAS00281
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATES
The following procedure applies to all of the
clutch plates.
1. Check:
clutch plate
Damage Replace the clutch plates as a
set.
2. Measure:
clutch plate warpage
(with a surface plate and thickness gauge 1 )
Out of specification Replace the clutch
plates as a set.
Clutch plate warpage limit
Less than 0.1 mm
EAS00283
CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRING AND
CLUTCH SPRING SEAT PLATE
1. Check:
clutch spring plate
Damage Replace.
2. Check:
clutch spring plate seat
Damage Replace.
3. Measure:
clutch spring free height
Out of specificatrion Replace the clutch
spring
Clutch spring free height
7.2 mm
<Limit>: 6.5 mm
EAS00284
CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING
1. Check:
clutch housing dogs
Damage/pitting/wear Deburr the clutch
housing dogs or replace the clutch housing.
NOTE:
Pitting on the clutch housing dogs will cause erratic clutch operation.
4-44
CLUTCH
ENG
EAS00295
INSTALLING THE CLUTCH
1. Install:
clutch housing 1
NOTE:
If the wire circlip 2 has been removed, carefully install a new one as shown.
2. Tighten:
lock washer New
clutch boss nut 1
70 Nm (7.0 mkg)
NOTE:
While holding the clutch boss with the clutch
holding tool 2 , tighten the clutch boss nut.
Clutch holding tool
90890-04086
3. Bend the lock washer tab along a flat side of
the nut.
4. Lubricate:
long clutch push rod
short clutch push rod
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
Lithium soap base grease
5. Lubricate:
friction plates
clutch plates
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
6. Install:
friction plates
clutch plates
long clutch push rod
short clutch push rod
bearing
washer
4-45
CLUTCH
ENG
NOTE:
Make sure that the semicircular slot a in the
friction plate is aligned with the mark b on the
clutch housing.
7. Install:
clutch pressure plate
clutch spring plate seat
clutch spring 1
clutch spring plate 2
clutch spring bolts 3
NOTE:
Tighten the clutch spring bolts in stages and in a
crisscross pattern.
Clutch spring bolt
8 Nm (0.8 mkg)
4-46
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
ENG
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
STATOR COIL AND PICKUP COIL
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order listed
Refer to “ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT”
in CHAPTER 3.
Removing the startor coil
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
Remarks
Left side cover
AC magneto lead/pickup lead/
sidestand switch lead
Footrest/shift pedal
Sidestand
Clutch adjusting cover/clutch cable
Left crankcase cover
Dowel pins
Gasket
Stator coil
Pickup coil
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”.
1
2
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-47
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
ENG
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
175 Nm (17.5 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Removing the generator and starter
clutch.
Rotor
Dowel pins
Springs
Woodruff key
Shaft
Starter idler gear
Circlip
Starter clutch drive gear
Starter clutch assembly
4-48
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed
1
6
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE GENERATOR.”
Refer to “INSTALLING THE
GENERATOR.”
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
ENG
EAS00347
REMOVING THE GENERATOR
1. Remove:
camshaft sprocket cover
tappet covers
Refer to “REAR CYLINDER HEAD.”
2. Align:
“T” mark a (with the stationary pointer b )
a. Temporarily install the AC magneto cover
without the pickup coil and stator coil.
b. Turn the crankshaft clockwise.
c. Align the “T” mark a with the stationary
pointer b on the crankcase cover (left) when
the rear piston is at TDC on the compression
stroke.
d. Check that the rear piston is at TDC in the
compression stroke.
e. The rear piston is at TDC on the compression
stroke when there is clearance at both of the
rocker arms. If there is no clearance then turn
the crankshaft clockwise one full turn.
f. When the “T” mark is aligned with the stationary pointer the punch mark c on the camshaft sprocket should be aligned with the stationary pointer d on the cylinder head.
3. Remove:
generator rotor nut 1
washer
NOTE:
While holding the generator rotor 2 with the
sheave holder 3 , loosen the generator rotor
nut.
Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the
projection on the generator rotor.
Sheave holder
90890-01701
4. Remove:
generator rotor 1
(with the flywheel puller set 2 and adapter
3)
woodruff key
4-49
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
ENG
NOTE:
Remove the rotor by pushing back the rotor,
the flywheel puller 2 and the adapter 3 .
Install the flywheel puller bolts and tighten the
center bolt, making sure that the tool body
stays parallel to the rotor. If necessary, one
holding bolt may be backed out slightly for realignment of the tool.
When rotor is removed, the dowel pins and
springs are scatter and dropping down. Do not
missing them.
Sheave holder:
90890-01701
Flywheel puller:
90890-01362
Adapter:
90890-04131
EAS00349
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH
1. Check:
starter clutch idle gear 1
starter clutch drive gear 2
Burrs/chips/roughness/wear Replace
the defective part(-s).
2. Check:
starter clutch operation
a. When turning the starter clutch drive gear
counter clockwise b , the starter clutch and
the starter clutch drive gear should engage.
If the starter clutch drive gear and starter
clutch do not engage, the starter clutch is
faulty and must be replaced.
b. When turning the starter clutch drive gear
clockwise a , it should turn freely.
If the starter clutch drive gear does not turn
freely, the starter clutch is faulty and must be
replaced.
4-50
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
ENG
INSTALLING THE GENERATOR
1. Install:
starter clutch assembly
NOTE:
Align the hole a on the starter clutch housing
with the hole b on the rotor.
Starter clutch bolt:
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
LOCTITE 
2. Install:
timing drive gear 1
springs 2
dowel pins 3
NOTE:
Align the punch mark a on the timing drive
gear with the key slide b .
Push the projections c on the timing drive
gear into the space d .
3. Install:
rotor assembly
NOTE:
Insert the suitable pin 1 into the hole of timing
chain drive gear sprocket and match the gear
teeth.
Align the punch mark a on the timing drive
gear 2 the punch mark b on the timing chain
drive gear sprocket and the key position c as
shown.
When installing the rotor, make sure the woodruff key is properly seated in the key way of the
crankshaft.
4. Tighten:
nut (rotor) 1
175 Nm (17.5 mkg)
NOTE:
Tighten the rotor nut 1 while holding the magneto rotor with a sheave holder 2 .
Sheave holder:
90890-01701
4-51
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
ENG
4. Check:
TDC on the compression stroke
If the marks do not align Adjust.
a. Align the “T” mark a with the stationary
pointer b on the left crankcase cover.
b. When the “T” mark is aligned with the stationary pointer, the punch mark c on the camshaft sprocket should be aligned with the stationary pointer d on the cylinder head.
4-52
SHIFT SHAFT
ENG
SHIFT SHAFT
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Removing the shift shaft and stopper
lever.
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
6
Left crankcase cover
Rotor assembly
Shift shaft
Circlip
Torsion spring (stopper lever)
Stopper lever
Circlip
Torsion spring (shift shaft)
Remarks
Refer to “ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT”
in CHAPTER 3.
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Refer to “INSTALLING THE SHIFT
SHAFT”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-53
SHIFT SHAFT
ENG
EAS00328
CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT
1. Check:
shift shaft 1
shift lever 2
Bends/damage/wear Replace.
shift lever spring 3
Damage/wear Replace.
EB408410
CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER
1. Check:
stopper lever
Bends/damage Replace.
Roller turns roughly Replace the stopper
lever.
EAS00331
INSTALLING THE SHIFT SHAFT
1. Install:
stopper lever 1
stopper lever spring 2
shift shaft lever 3
NOTE:
Hook the ends of the stopper lever spring onto
the stopper lever and the crankcase boss.
Mesh the stopper lever with the shift drum segment assembly.
4-54
OIL PUMP
ENG
OIL PUMP
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
12 Nm (1.2 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
Refer to “ CLUTCH”.
Removing the oil pump
Rotor assembly
1
2
3
4
5
Crankcase cover (right)
Driven gear cover
Driven gear (oil pump)/Oil pump drive
chain
Oil pump assembly
O-rings/dowel pin
Oil delivery pipe
Remarks
1
1/1
1
2/1
1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-55
OIL PUMP
ENG
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
Disassembling the oil pump
Oil pump cover
Oil pump body
Oil pump rotor (inner)
Oil pump rotor (outer)
Pin
Oil pump body
Oil pump rotor (inner)
Oil pump rotor (outer)
Pin
Dowel pins
Oil pump shaft
Washer
Circlip
Oil strainer
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE OIL
PUMP”.
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE OIL
PUMP”.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
4-56
OIL PUMP
ENG
EAS00364
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP
1. Check:
oil pump driven gear
oil pump body
oil pump driven gear cover
Cracks/damage/wear Replace the defective part(-s).
2. Measure:
inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance a
outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-body-side clearance
b
oil-pump-body-to-inner-rotor-and-outer-rotor clearance c
Out of specification Replace the oil pump.
1 Inner rotor
2 Outer rotor
3 Oil pump body
Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip
clearance
0.03 0.09 mm
<Limit>: 0.15 mm
Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-body-side
clearance
0.03 0.08 mm
<Limit>: 0.15 mm
Oil-pump-body-to-inner-rotor and
outer-rotor clealance
0.03 0.08 mm
<Limit>: 0.15 mm
EAS00367
CHECKING THE OIL DELIVERY PIPES
The following procedure applies to all of the oil
delivery pipes.
1. Check:
oil delivery pipes 1
Damage Replace.
Obstruction Wash and blow out with compressed air.
EAS00368
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER
1. Check:
oil strainer 1
Damage Replace.
Contaminants Clean with engine oil.
4-57
OIL PUMP
ENG
EAS00376
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP
1. Assemble:
oil pump
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
CAUTION:
After tightening the bolts, make sure that the
oil pump turns smoothly.
NOTE:
Align the pin a with the slots b on the inner rotor.
4-58
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
ENG
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
CRANKCASE
38.5 Nm (3.85 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
Q’ty
Removing the crankshaft assembly
Engine assembly
Cylinder head
Cylinder and piston
Clutch assembly
AC magneto and starter clutch
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”.
Refer to “CYLINDER HEADS”.
Refer to “CYLINDERS AND PISTONS”.
Refer to “CLUTCH”.
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH”.
Refer to “SHIFT SHAFT”.
Refer to “OIL PUMP”.
1
2
3
Shift shaft
Oil pump assembly
Oil level gauge
Neutral switch
Shift shaft stopper plate
1
1
1
4
Crankcase (right)
1
5
6
Dowel pins
Relief valve
3
1
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE
CRANKCASE”.
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/ASSEMBLING
THE CRANKCASE”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-59
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
ENG
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1
Removing the crankshaft and
connecting rod
Crankshaft assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Oil pump drive sprocket
Bearing
Nuts (connecting rod caps)
Connecting rod bolts
Connecting rods
Connecting rod caps
Plain bearings
1
1
4
4
2
2
4
4-60
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE CRANKSHAFT”.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE
CRANKSHAFT”.
Refer to “REMOVING THE CONNECTING
RODS/INSTALLING THE
CRANKSHAFT”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
ENG
EAS00386
A
DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE
1. Remove:
crankcase bolts
NOTE:
Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in
stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of
the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
Loosen the bolts in decreasing numerical order (refer to the numbers in the illustration.)
B
A Right crankcase
B Left crankcase
2. Remove:
right crankcase
NOTE:
For this removal, slits a in the crankcase can
be use as shown.
CAUTION:
Use a soft hammer to tap on one side of the
crankcase. Tap only on reinforced portions
of the crankcase. Do not tap on the crankcase mating surfaces. Work slowly and
carefully. Make sure that the crankcase
halves separate evenly.
4-61
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
ENG
EB412111
REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT
1. Remove:
crankshaft assembly 1
NOTE:
Remove the crankshaft assembly with the
crankcase separating tool 2 .
Make sure that the crankcase separating tool
is centered over the crankshaft assembly.
Crankcase separating tool
90890-01135
EB412121
REMOVING THE CONNECTING RODS
1. Remove:
connecting rods 1
big end bearings
NOTE:
Identify the position of each big end bearing so
that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
EB413404
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
1. Measure:
crankshaft runout
Out of specification Replace the crankshaft.
Crankshaft runout
Less than 0.02 mm
2. Check:
crankshaft journal surfaces
crankshaft pin surfaces
bearing surfaces
Scratches/wear Replace the crankshaft.
3. Measure:
crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing
clearance
Out of specification Replace the big end
bearings.
Crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing
clearance
0.044 0.073 mm
The following procedure applies to all of the
connecting rods.
4-62
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
ENG
CAUTION:
Do not interchange the big end bearings and
connecting rods. To obtain the correct
crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing clearance
and prevent engine damage, the big end
bearings must be installed in their original
positions.
a. Clean the big end bearings, crankshaft pins,
and the inside of the connecting rod halves.
b. Install the big end upper bearing into the connecting rod and the big end lower bearing
into the connecting rod cap.
NOTE:
Align the projections a on the big end bearings
with the notches b in the connecting rod and
connecting rod cap.
c. Put a piece of Plastigauge 1 on the crankshaft pin.
d. Assemble the connecting rod halves.
NOTE:
Do not move the connecting rod or crankshaft
until the clearance measurement has been
completed.
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease onto the
bolts, threads, and nut seats.
Make sure that the “Y” mark 2 on the connecting rod faces towards the left side of the crankshaft.
Make sure that the characters 3 on both the
connecting rod and connecting rod cap are
aligned.
e. Tighten the connecting rod nuts.
CAUTION:
When tightening the connecting rod nuts,
be sure to use an F-type torque wrench.
Without pausing, tighten the connecting
rod nuts to the specified torque. Apply continuous torque between 4.3 and 4.8 mkg.
Once you reach 4.3 mkg, DO NOT STOP
TIGHTENING until the specified torque is
reached.
If the tightening is interrupted between 4.3
and 4.8 mkg, loosen the connecting rod
nut to less than 4.3 mkg and start again.
4-63
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
ENG
Refer to “INSTALLING THE CONNECTING
RODS”.
Connecting rod nut
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
f. Remove the connecting rod and big end
bearings.
Refer to “REMOVING THE CONNECTING
RODS”.
g. Measure the compressed Plastigauge
width 1 on each crankshaft pin.
If the clearance is out of specification, select
replacement big end bearings.
4. Select:
big end bearings (P1,P2)
NOTE:
The numbers 1 stamped into the crankshaft
web and the numbers 2 on the connecting
rods are used to determine the replacement
big end bearing sizes.
“P1,P2” refer to the bearings shown in the
crankshaft illustration.
For example, if the connecting rod “P1” and the
crankshaft web “P1” numbers are “4” and “1” respectively, then the bearing size for “P1” is:
Bearing size for “P1”:
“P1” (connecting rod) – “P1”
(crankshaft web) =
4 – 1 = 3 (brown)
Rear cylinder lower bearing/Front cylinder upper and lower bearing.
BEARING COLOR CODE
1
blue
2
black
3
brown
4
green
5
yellow
Rear cylinder upper bearing
BEARING COLOR CODE
1
2
3
4
5
4-64
black
brown
green
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
ENG
EB412440
CHECKING THE BEARINGS AND OIL
SEALS
1. Check:
bearings
Clean and lubricate the bearings, then rotate
the inner race with your finger
Rough movement Replace.
2. Check:
oil seals
Damage/wear Replace.
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT
3. Install:
connecting rod bearings 1
NOTE:
Align the projection a of the bearings with the
notches b in the connecting rod cap.
Install each bearing in its original place.
4. Install:
connecting rods 1
NOTE:
The stamped “Y” mark a on the connecting
rods should face towards the left side of the
crankcase.
Install each connecting rod in its original place.
5. Install:
connecting rod cap 1
NOTE:
Be sure that the characters a on the side of the
cap and connecting rod are aligned.
6. Tighten:
nuts (connecting rod cap)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
NOTE:
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to the rod
cap bolt threads and nut surfaces.
4-65
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
ENG
CAUTION:
When tightening the nuts be sure to use an
F-type torque wrench.
Without pausing tighten to full torque
specification. Apply continuous torque between 4.3 and 4.8 mkg. Once you reach 4.3
mkg DO NOT STOP TIGHTENING until final torque is reached. If the tightening is interrupted between 4.3 and 4.8 mkg, loosen
the nut to less than 4.3 mkg and start
again.
7. Install:
crankshaft installing tool
NOTE:
Attach the spacer to the bearing inner race.
Crankshaft installer pot 1
90890-01274
Crankshaft installer bolt 2
90890-01275
Adapter 3
90890-04130
Spacer 4
90890-04060
8. Install:
crankshaft 1
NOTE:
Align the left connecting rod with the rear cylinder sleeve hole.
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE
1. Apply:
engine oil
(onto the main journal bearings)
sealant
(onto the crankcase mating surfaces)
Yamaha Bond No. 1215:
90890-85505
4-66
ENG
CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING RODS
2. Tighten:
crankcase bolts
(follow the proper tightening sequence)
NOTE:
The numbers embossed on the crankcase indicate the crankcase tightening sequence.
38.5Nm (3.85 mkg)
4 X 6 (M10)
1 X 3 , 7 X 19 (M6)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
NOTE:
Lubricate the bolt threads with engine oil.
Tighten the bolts in increasing numerical order.
M6
30 mm
1 X 3 , 10 X 14 , 17 X 19
M6
30 mm
(Chromium
plated bolt)
15
, 16
8
M6
55 mm
M6
80 mm
M10
60 mm
5
M10
70 mm
4
M10
100 mm
6
19 :with
7
, 9
engine ground lead
3. Install:
shift shaft stopper plate 1
NOTE:
Install the shift shaft stopper plate as shown.
4-67
TRANSMISSION
ENG
TRANSMISSION
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “CRANKSHAFT”.
Transmission removal
Crankcase separation
Guide bar
Shift fork 1 “R”
Shift fork 2 “C”
Shift fork 3 “L”
Shift drum
Main axle assembly
Drive axle assembly
Middle driven gear
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Refer to “INSTALLING THE
TRANSMISSION”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-68
TRANSMISSION
ENG
EAS00421
CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS
The following procedure applies to all of the shift
forks and related components.
1. Check:
shift fork cam follower 1
shift fork pawl 2
Bends/damage/scoring/wear Replace
the shift fork.
2. Check:
shift fork guide bar
Roll the shift fork guide bar on a flat surface.
Bends Replace.
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten a bent shift fork
guide bar.
3. Check:
shift fork movement
(on the shift fork guide bar)
Rough movement Replace the shift forks
and shift fork guide bar as a set.
EAS00422
CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY
1. Check:
shift drum grooves
Damage/scratches/wear Replace the
shift drum.
shift drum segment 1
Damage/wear Replace.
shift drum bearing 2
Damage/pitting Replace.
4-69
TRANSMISSION
ENG
EAS00424
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION
1. Measure:
main axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge)
Out of specification Replace the main
axle.
Main axle runout limit
0.08 mm
2. Measure:
drive axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge)
Out of specification Replace the drive
axle.
Drive axle runout limit
0.08 mm
3. Check:
transmission gears
Blue discoloration/pitting/wear Replace
the defective gear(-s).
transmission gear dogs
Cracks/damage/rounded edges Replace
the defective gear(-s).
4. Check:
transmission gear movement
Rough movement Replace the defective
part(-s).
5. Check:
washers
Damage/bends/looseness Replace.
6. Check:
bearings
Un smooth Replace.
4-70
TRANSMISSION
ENG
EAS00430
INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION
1. Install:
shift drum assembly
NOTE:
Turn the shift drum assembly to the neutral position.
2. Install:
main axle assembly 1
drive axle assembly 2
shift fork “L” 3
shift fork “C” 4
shift fork “R” 5
shift fork guide bars 6
NOTE:
The embossed marks on the shift forks should
face towards the right side of the engine and
be in the following sequence:
“R”, “C”, “L”.
When installing the middle drive gear 7 , align
the slit a on the guide bar with the middle drive
gear.
WARNING
Always use new circlips.
3. Check:
transmission
Rough movement Repair.
NOTE:
Oil each gear, shaft, and bearing thoroughly.
4-71
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
MIDDLE GEAR
MIDDLE DRIVE PINION GEAR
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Removing the middle drive pinion
gear
Sepalate the crankcase
1
Bearing retainer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Spring retainers
Spring seat
Damper spring
Damper cams
Nut
Bearing
Shim(s)
Middle drive pinion shaft
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Refer to “CRANKSHAFT AND
CONNECTING ROD.”
Refer to “REMOVING THE MIDDLE
DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY/INSTALLING
THE MIDDLE GEAR ASSEMBLY AND
ADJUSTING THE BACKLASH”.
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/
ASSEMBLING THE MIDDLE DRIVE
SHAFT ASSEMBLY”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-72
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
MIDDLE DRIVEN PINION GEAR
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1
2
3
4
5
Removing the middle driven
pinion gear.
Bolts
Circlips
Bearings
Driven yoke
Nut
3
2
2
1
1
6
Drive yoke
1
7
8
9
Bearing housing/O-ring
Washers
Collar
1/1
3
1
4-73
Refer to “REMOVING THE MIDDLE
DRIVEN SHAFT ASSEMBLY/
INSTALLING THE UNIVERSAL JOINT”.
Refer to “REMOVING THE MIDDLE
DRIVEN SHAFT ASSEMBLY/INSTALING
THE MIDDLE GEAR ASSEMBLY AND
ADJUSTING THE BACKLASH”.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE MIDDLE
GEAR ASSEMBLY AND ADJUSTING
THE BACKLASH”.
MIDDLE GEAR
Order
Job name/Part name
ENG
Q’ty
Remarks
Refer to “INSTALLING THE MIDDLE
GEAR ASSEMBLY AND ADJUSTING
THE BACKLASH”.
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE MIDDLE
DRIVEN SHAFT ASSEMBLY”.
10
11
Collapsible collar
Middle driven shaft
1
1
12
13
14
Oil seal
Bearing
Bearing
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
4-74
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
1. Remove:
bearing retainer
middle drive shaft assembly
a. Straighten the thread on the bearing retainer.
b. Attach the bearing retainer wrench 1 .
Bearing retainer wrench:
90890-04137
c. Remove the bearing retainer and middle
drive shaft assembly.
DISASSEMBLING THE
SHAFT ASSEMBLY
1. Remove:
spring retainers 1
MIDDLE
DRIVE
NOTE:
While compressing the spring with a damper
spring compressor 2 , remove the spring retainers.
Damper spring compressor
90890-04090
2. Straighten the thread on the middle drive
shaft nut.
3. Remove:
middle drive shaft nut 1
bearing 2
middle drive shaft 3
a. Attach the middle drive shaft holder 4 onto
the middle drive shaft as shown.
Middle drive shaft holder
90890-04055
b. Secure the middle drive shaft holder in a
vice.
c. Loosen the middle drive shaft nut with the
middle drive shaft nut wrench 5 .
Middle drive shaft nut wrench
90890-04138
d. Remove the middle drive shaft nut and bearing.
4-75
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
REMOVING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT
ASSEMBLY
1. Remove:
universal joint
a. Remove the circlips 1 .
b. Place the universal joint in a press.
c. With a pipe of the proper diameter positioned
beneath the universal joint driven yoke as
shown, press the bearing into the pipe.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to lightly tap the universal
joint driven yoke.
d. Repeat the above steps to remove the opposite side’s bearing.
e. Separate the universal joint yokes.
2. Loosen:
middle driven shaft nut 1
NOTE:
While holding the universal joint driven yoke 2
with the universal joint holder 3 , loosen the
middle driven shaft nut.
Universal joint holder
90890-04062
EAS00438
CHECKING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
1. Check:
damper cam surface
Scratches/wear Replace the damper cam.
2. Check:
spring
Cracks/damage Replace.
EAS00439
CHECKING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT
ASSEMBLY
1. Check:
middle drive gear 1
middle driven gear 2
Galling/pitting/wear Replace the middle
driven shaft assembly.
2. Check:
bearings
Damage/pitting Replace the middle drive
shaft bearing housing assembly.
4-76
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
3. Check:
O-ring
oil seal
Damage Replace the defective part(-s).
4. Check:
universal joint movement
Rough movement Replace the universal
joint.
EAS00441
ASSEMBLING THE MIDDLE DRIVE SHAFT
ASSEMBLY
1. Tighten:
middle drive shaft nut 1
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
NOTE:
Set the torque wrench at a right angle to the
middle drive shaft nut wrench 2 .
Lock the threads on the middle drive shaft nut
by staking them with a center punch.
Middle drive shaft nut wrench 2
90890-04138
Middle drive shaft holder 3
90890-04055
2. Install:
spring retainers 1
NOTE:
While compress the spring with the damper
spring compressor 2 , and then install the
spring retainers.
Damper spring compressor
90890-04090
4-77
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
ASSEMBLING THE MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT
ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
The following points are critical when assembling the middle gears:
The collapsible collar must be replaced whenever the middle driven shaft assembly is removed from the middle driven shaft bearing
housing.
When performing this procedure for the first
time, be sure to have at least one extra collapsible collar on hand.
1. Install:
bearing outer race
(into the middle driven shaft bearing housing)
WARNING
Do not press the bearing outer race. During
installation, always press the bearing inner
race carefully.
2. Install:
middle driven shaft nut
NOTE:
Finger tighten the middle driven shaft mut.
INSTALLING THE MIDDLE GEAR ASSEMBLY AND ADJUSTING THE BACKLASH
NOTE:
When installing the middle gear assembly, be
sure to replace the following parts:
- collapsible collar
1. Install:
middle driven shaft assembly 1
25 Nm (2.5 mkg)
4-78
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
2. Install:
shim
middle drive shaft assembly
3. Install:
bearing retainer
Install steps:
Attach the bearing retainer wrench 1 .
Bearing retainer wrench:
90890-04137
Tighten the bearing retainer.
Bearing retainer:
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
Lock the threads on the bearing retainer by
staking them with a center punch.
4. Adjust:
middle gear backlash
Middle gear backlash:
0.1 0.2 mm
a. Install the universal joint holder 1 and
middle gear backlash band 2 as shown.
Universal joint holder
90890-04062
Middle gear backlash band
90890-01231
b. Make sure that the dial gauge plunger on the
middle gear backlash band as shown.
a Dial-gauge-plunger contact point: 68.2 mm
c. Remove the middle driven pinion gear nut
and apply the LOCKTITE on it.
d. Reinstall the middle driven pinion gear nut.
e. While measure the middle gear backlash,
tighten the middle driven pinion gear nut until
specific backlash.
4-79
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
CAUTION:
Do not over tighten the middle driven pinion
gear nut. If over tighten the middle driven
pinion gear nut, replace the collapsible collar and adjust the backlash.
f. Stake the middle driven pinion gear shaft
thread.
INSTALLING THE UNIVERSAL JOINT
4. Install:
universal joint driven yoke/cross joint 1
(into the universal joint drive yoke)
CAUTION:
Do not hammer the universal joint drive
yoke or the collapsible collar may be distorted. This will result in a change in the
standard spinning torque, requiring replacement of the collapsible collar and reassembly of the middle driven shaft assembly.
2. Install:
bearings 2
(onto the universal joint driven yoke/cross
joint)
CAUTION:
The needles can easily fall out of their races,
so check each bearing carefully. Slide the
universal joint driven yoke assembly back
and forth on the bearings. If a needle is out of
place, the yoke will not go all the way onto
the bearings.
3. Press each bearing into the universal joint
driven yoke assembly with a socket of the
proper size.
NOTE:
The bearings must be inserted far enough into
the universal joint driven yoke assembly so that
circlips 3 can be installed.
4-80
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
EAS00452
ALIGNING THE MIDDLE GEAR
NOTE:
Aligning the middle gear is necessary when any
of the following parts are replaced:
Crankcase
Middle drive shaft
1. Select:
middle drive gear shim(-s) 1
NOTE:
Select the middle drive gear shim(-s) 1 by calculating the middle drive gear shim thickness
and then measuring the middle gear backlash.
a. Position the middle drive gear with the appropriate shim(-s) 1 that has had its respective thickness calculated from information
marked on the crankcase and the end of the
middle drive gear.
b. To find middle drive gear shim thickness
“A”, use the following formula.
Middle drive gear shim thickness
“A” = a – c
a =“43.00”
b =a numeral on the upper crankcase near
the main bearing selection numbers and
which is added to the nominal size “42”
Example:
a is 43.00
If the upper crankcase is marked “46” b
c is 42.46 (i.e., 42.00 + 0.46 =42.46)
“A” = 43.00 – 42.46 = 0.54
Round off to the hundredths digit and select
the appropriate shim(-s).
NOTE:
In the above example, the calculated number
is 0.54. The chart instructs you to round off
the 4 to 5. Thus, the shim thickness is 0.55
mm.
4-81
MIDDLE GEAR
ENG
Hundredths
Rounded value
0, 1, 2
0
3, 4, 5, 6,
5
7, 8, 9
10
Shims are supplied in the following thickness.
Middle drive pinion gear shim:
Thickness (mm)
4-82
0.10, 0.15, 0.20
CARB
5
CARB
CHAPTER 5
CARBURETION
CARBURETOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CARBURETORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE CARBURETORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASURING AND ADJUSTING THE FUEL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-7
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIR INDUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-8
CARBURETOR
CARB
CARBURETION
CARBURETOR
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Removing the carburetors
Fuel tank
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “FUEL TANK AND SEATS” in
CHAPTER 3.
Air filter case assembly
Air ducts
Cylinder head breather hose
Air chamber
Cover
Throttle position sensor lead
Carburetor heater lead
Fuel hoses
Carburetor assembly
Starter cable
Throttle cables
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
Disconnect
Disconnect
Disconnect
Disconnect
NOTE:
After removing the carburetor assembly,
remove the starter cable and throttle
cables.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
5-1
CARBURETOR
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
CARB
Remarks
Disassemble the parts in the order listed.
Disassembling the carburetor.
Carburetor heater leads
Carburetor heaters
Float chamber/gasket
Float
Needle valve set
Main jet
Jet holder
Pilot jet
Starter jet
Jet needle set
Starter plunger set
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5-2
12V 30W
Refer to “CARBURETOR ASSEMBLY”.
CARBURETOR
Order
Job name/Part name
CARB
Q’ty
Remarks
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE CARBURE
TORS”.
Refer to “CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
THE THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR (TPS)”.
12
Diaphragm set
1
13
Throttle position sensor
1
14
15
16
17
18
Pilot screw
Main air jet
Pilot air jet 1
Pilot air jet 2
Throttle stop screw set
1
1
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
5-3
CARBURETORS
CARB
EB600031
CHECKING THE CARBURETORS
The following procedure applies to all of the carburetors.
1. Check:
carburetor body
float chamber
jet housing
Cracks/damage Replace.
2. Check:
fuel passages
Obstruction Clean.
a. Wash the carburetor in a petroleumbased
solvent. Do not use any caustic-carburetorcleaning solution.
b. Blow out all of the passages and jets with
compressed air.
3. Check:
float chamber body
Dirt Clean.
4. Check:
float chamber rubber gasket
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
5. Check:
float
Damage Replace.
6. Check:
needle valve 1
needle valve seat 2
O-ring 3
Damage/obstruction/wear Replace the
needle valve, needle valve seat and O-ring
as a set.
7. Check:
piston valve 1
Damage/scratches/wear Replace.
rubber diaphragm 2
Cracks/tears Replace.
5-4
CARBURETOR
CARB
8. Check:
vacuum chamber cover 1
piston valve spring 2
plastic cap 3
O-ring 4
spring 5
Cracks/damage Replace.
9. Check:
jet needle 1
needle jet 2
main jet 3
pilot screw 4
pilot jet 5
main air jet 6
starter jet 7
Bends/damage/wear Replace.
Obstruction Clean.
Blow out the jets with compressed air.
10. Check:
piston valve movement
Insert the piston valve into the carburetor
body and move it up and down.
Tightness Replace the piston valve.
11. Check.
fuel feed pipes
hose joint
Cracks/damage Replace.
Obstruction Clean.
Blow out the pipes with compressed air.
12. Check:
fuel feed hoses
fuel hoses
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
Obstruction Clean.
Blow out the hoses with compressed air.
5-5
CARBURETOR
CARB
EB600042
ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETORS
The following procedure applies to both of the
carburetors.
CAUTION:
Before assembling the carburetors, wash
all of the parts in a petroleum-based solvent.
Always use a new gasket.
1. Install:
coasting enricher diaphragm
coasting enricher spring
coasting enricher cover
NOTE:
Align the holes a on the coasting enricher diaphragm with the projections b in the carburetor body.
When installing the coasting enricher, position
the throttle connecting arm 1 as shown.
2. Install:
connecting bolts
NOTE:
After installing the connecting bolts, check that
the throttle cable lever and starter plunger link
operate smoothly.
EB600051
INSTALLING THE CARBURETORS
1. Adjust:
carburetor synchronization
Refer to “SYNCHRONIZING THE CARBURETORS” in chapter 3.
2. Adjust:
engine idling speed
Engine idling speed
950 1,050 r/min
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING
SPEED” in chapter 3.
3. Adjust:
throttle cable free play
Throttle cable free play
(at the flange of the throttle grip)
4 6 mm
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE
CABLE FREE PLAY” in chapter 3.
5-6
CARBURETOR
CARB
EB600063
MEASURING AND ADJUSTING THE FUEL
LEVEL
1. Measure:
fuel level a
Out of specification Adjust.
Fuel level (above the line on
the float chamber)
4 5 mm
a. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
b. Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand to
ensure that the motorcycle is standing
straight up.
c. Install the fuel level gauge 1 to the fuel drain
pipe 2 .
Fuel level gauge
90890-01312
d. Loosen the fuel drain screw 3 .
e. Hold the fuel level gauge vertically next to the
upper face of the float chamber 4 .
f. Measure the fuel level a .
NOTE:
Fuel level readings should be equal on both
sides of the carburetor assembly.
2. Adjust:
fuel level
a. Remove the carburetor assembly.
b. Check the needle valve seat and needle
valve.
c. If either is worn, replace them as a set.
d. If both are fine, adjust the float level by slightly bending the float tang 1 .
e. Install the carburetor assembly.
f. Measure the fuel level again.
g. Repeat steps (a) to (f) until the fuel level is
within specification.
5-7
CARBURETOR
CARB
EB600071
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
THE
NOTE:
_ Before adjusting the throttle position sensor,
the engine idling speed should be properly adjusted.
1. Inspect:
_ throttle position sensor
a. Disconnect the throttle position sensor coupler.
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω
1k) to the
throttle position sensor.
Tester positive lead blue 1
Tester negative lead black 2
c. Check the throttle position sensor resistance
“R1”.
Out of specification Replace the throttle
position sensor.
Throttle position sensor
resistance “R1”
4 X 6 kΩ at 20_C (68_F)
(blue – black)
d. Connect the pocket tester (Ω
throttle position sensor.
1k) to the
Tester positive lead yellow 3
Tester negative lead black 2
e. While slowly opening the throttle, check that
the throttle position sensor resistance “R2” is
within the specified range.
Out of specification Replace the throttle
position sensor.
Throttle position sensor
resistance “R2”
0.56 X 0.84 kΩ to 3.01 X
4.51 kΩ at 20_C (68_F)
(yellow – black)
2. Adjust:
_ throttle position sensor angle
a. Loosen the throttle position sensor screws
1.
b. Turn the throttle position sensor in direction
a or b until the specified closed-throttle resistance is indicated on the pocket tester.
5-8
CARBURETOR
CARB
Closed-throttle resistance
0.56 0.84 kΩ at 20°C
(yellow – black)
c. Tighten the throttle position sensor screws.
NOTE:
Remove the pocket tester leads and connect
the throttle position sensor coupler.
5-9
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (AIS)
CARB
EB601000
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (AIS)
AIR INDUTION
This system burns the unburned exhaust gases
by injecting fresh air (secondary air) at the exhaust port. This is to reduce the output of the hydrocarbons.
When there is negative pressure around the exhaust port, the reed valve opens and the secondary air flows into the exhaust port.
The required temperature for burning the unburned exhaust gases is approximately 600_ to
700_C.
AIR CUT-OFF VALVE
The air cut-off valve is operated by intake gas
pressure through the diaphragm. Normally, this
valve is opened in order to allow fresh air to flow
into the exhaust port.
When the throttle is rapidly closed, negative
pressure is generated and the valve closes in
order to prevent after-burning.
VIEW 1. (NO FLOW)
When decelerating (the throttle closes), the
valve will close.
VIEW 2. (FLOW)
During normal operation the valve is open.
VEIW 1
A
B
C
1
VEIW 2
5-10
From the air filter
To the cylinder heads
To the carburetor joint
Reed valve
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (AIS)
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
E
CARB
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM INSPECTION
1. Inspect:
hose connections
Poor connections Properly connect.
hoses
reed valves
air cut-off valve
air filter
Cracks/damage Replace.
Clogged Clean.
Reed valve
Air filter
Orifice
Carburetor joint (near cylinder)
To the front cylinder head
To the rear cylinder head
To the orifice
To the carburetor joint (rear cylinder)
To the AIS valve
NOTE:
The orifice 3 should be installed with the arrow
mark facing the AIS valve side.
5-11
CARB
CHAS
6
CHAS
CHAPTER 6
CHASSIS
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE BRAKE DISCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC BALANCE . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-3
6-3
6-5
6-7
6-8
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUFFLER AND BRAKE CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL DRIVE HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC BALANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-14
6-15
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRONT BRAKE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR BRAKE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . .
FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR BRAKE CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE CALIPERS . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-20
6-22
6-24
6-26
6-26
FRONT FORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISASSEMBLY THE FRONT FORK LEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
6-46
6-46
6-47
6-48
6-51
6-27
6-28
6-30
6-32
6-34
6-36
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-40
CHAS
HANDLEBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
6-54
6-54
6-55
STEERING HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58
6-60
6-60
6-61
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIGHT SIDE COVER AND BATTERY BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEFT SIDE COVER AND TOOL BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND GA6
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND GAS
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING THE SWINGARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE REAR SHGOCK ABSORBER AND GAS
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE SWINGARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE SWINGARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
6-63
6-64
6-65
SHAFT DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL FOR CONTAMINATION AND
INSPECTING THE SHAFT DRIVE FOR LEAKS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASURING THE RING GEAR BACKLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJUSTING THE RING GEAR BACKLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY AND DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINAL GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE RING GEAR BEARINGS . . . .
ALIGNING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR AND RING GEAR . .
CHECKING THE DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLING THE DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-72
6-72
6-66
6-66
6-67
6-68
6-69
6-69
6-70
6-70
6-75
6-76
6-77
6-79
6-80
6-81
6-82
6-83
6-87
6-87
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
CHAS
CHASSIS
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
59 Nm (5.9 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Removing the front wheel and brake
discs
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so
there is no danger of it falling over.
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
1
1
1
2
2
Brake calipers
Front wheel axle pinch bolt
Front wheel axle
Front wheel assembly
Collars
Brake discs
6-1
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE FRONT WHEEL”.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE FRONT
WHEEL”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
Order
1
2
3
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Disassembling the front wheel
Oil seals
Bearings
Collar
CHAS
Remarks
Disassemble the parts in the order listed.
2
2
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
6-2
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
CHAS
EAS00521
REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that
the front wheel is elevated.
2. Remove:
brake calipers 1 (left and right)
NOTE:
Do not squeeze the brake lever when removing
the brake calipers.
3. Loosen:
pinch bolt (front wheel axle) 1
front wheel axle 2
4. Elevate:
front wheel
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that
the front wheel is elevated.
EAS00526
CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Check:
wheel axle
Roll the wheel axle on a flat surface.
Bends Replace.
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten a bent wheel axle.
2. Check:
tire
front wheel
Damage/wear Replace.
Refer to “CHECKING THE TIRES” and
“CHECKING THE WHEELS” in chapter 3.
3. Check:
spokes
Bends/damage Replace.
Loose Tighten.
Tap the spokes with a screwdriver.
6-3
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
CHAS
NOTE:
A tight spoke will emit a clear, ringing tone, a
loose spoke will sound flat.
4. Tighten:
spokes
3 Nm (0.3mkg)
NOTE:
After tightening the spokes, measure the front
wheel runout.
5. Measure:
front wheel radial runout 1
front wheel lateral runout 2
Over the specified limits Replace.
Front wheel radial runout limit
1.0 mm
Front wheel lateral runout limit
0.5 mm
6. Check:
collars
Damage/wear Replace.
WARNING
New tires have a relatively low grip on the
road surface until they have been slightly
worn.
Therefore, approximately 100 km should
be traveled at normal speed before any
highspeed riding is done.
7. Check
wheel bearings
Front wheel turns roughly or is loose Replace the wheel bearings.
oil seals
Damage/wear Replace.
8. Replace:
wheel bearings (New)
oil seals (New)
6-4
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
CHAS
a. Clean the outside of the front wheel hub.
b. Remove the oil seals 1 with a flat-head
screwdriver.
NOTE:
To prevent damaging the wheel, place a rag between the screwdriver and the wheel surface.
c. Remove the wheel bearings with a general
bearing puller 2 .
d. Install the new wheel bearings and oil seals
in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
Do not contact the wheel bearing center race
4 or balls 5 . Contact should be made only
with the outer race 6 .
NOTE:
Use a socket 3 that matches the diameter of
the wheel bearing outer race and oil seal.
EAS00531
CHECKING THE BRAKE DISCS
The following procedure applies to all of the
brake discs.
1. Check:
brake disc
Damage/galling Replace.
2. Measure:
brake disc deflection 1
Out of specification Correct the brake disc
deflection or replace the brake disc.
Brake disc deflection limit
(maximum)
Front: 0.15 mm
Rear: 0.15 mm
a. Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so
that the wheel is elevated.
b. Before measuring the front brake disc deflection, turn the handlebar to the left or right to
ensure that the front wheel is stationary.
6-5
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
CHAS
c. Remove the brake caliper.
d. Hold the dial gauge at a right angle against
the brake disc surface.
e. Measure the deflection 2 – 3 mm below the
edge of the brake disc.
3. Measure:
brake disc thickness 1
Measure the brake disc thickness at a few
different locations.
Out of specification Replace.
Brake disc thickness limit
(minimum)
Front: 4.5 mm
Rear: 5.5 mm
4. Adjust:
brake disc deflection
a. Remove the brake disc.
b. Rotate the brake disc by one bolt hole.
c. Install the brake disc.
NOTE:
Tighten the brake disc bolts in stages and in a
crisscross pattern.
Brake disc bolt
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
LOCTITE
d. Measure the brake disc deflection.
e. If out of specification, repeat the adjustment
steps until the brake disc deflection is within
specification.
f. If the brake disc deflection cannot be brought
within specification, replace the brake disc.
6-6
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
CHAS
EAS00544
INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL
The following procedure applies to both brake
discs.
1. Lubricate:
wheel axle
oil seallips
Recommended lubricant
Lithium soap base grease
2. Install:
front wheel assembly
NOTE:
The arrow mark a on the tire must point in the
direction of the wheel.
3. Tighten:
wheel axle 1
wheel axle pinch bolt 2
59 Nm (5.9 mkg)
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
CAUTION:
Before tightening the wheel axle nut, push
down hard on the handlebar several times and
check if the front fork rebounds smoothly.
4. Install:
brake caliper
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
WARNING
Make sure that the brake hose is routed
properly.
6-7
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
CHAS
EAS00549
ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC
BALANCE
NOTE:
_ After replacing the tire, wheel or both, the front
wheel static balance shourd be adjusted.
_ Adjust the front wheel static balance with the
brake discs installed.
1. Remove:
_ balancing weight (-s)
NOTE:
Place the front wheel on a suitable balancing
stand.
2. Find:
_ front wheel’s heavy spot
a. Spin the front wheel.
b. When the front wheel stops, put an “X1” mark
at the bottom of the wheel.
c. Turn the front wheel 90_ so that the “X1” mark
is positioned as shown.
d. Release the front wheel.
e. When the wheel stops, put an “X2” mark at
the bottom of the wheel.
f. Repeat steps (b) through (d) several times
until all the marks come to rest at the same
spot.
g. The spot where all the marks come to rest is
the front wheel’s heavy spot “X”.
3. Adjust:
_ front wheel static balance
a. Install a balancing weight 1 onto the rimexactly opposite the heavy spot “X”.
NOTE:
Start with the lightest weight.
b. Turn the front wheel 90_ so that the heavy
spot is positioned as shown.
c. If the heavy spot does not stay in that position, install a heavier weight.
d. Repeat steps (b) and (c) until the front wheel
is balanced.
6-8
FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE DISCS
CHAS
4. Check:
front wheel static balance
a. Turn the front wheel and make sure that it
stays at each position shown.
b. If the front wheel does not remain stationary
at all of the positions, rebalance it.
6-9
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC
CHAS
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC
MUFFLER AND BRAKE CALIPER
20 Nm (2.0mkg)
30 Nm (3.0mkg)
40 Nm (4.0mkg)
20 Nm (2.0mkg)
25 Nm (2.5m kg)
Order
1
2
3
4
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Removing the muffler and brake
caliper
Muffler
Muffler stay
Brake hose holder
Brake caliper
1
1
1
1
6-10
Refer to “REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC
CHAS
REAR WHEEL
23 Nm (2.3mkg)
40 Nm (4.0mkg)
23 Nm (2.3mkg)
90 Nm (9.0mkg)
107 Nm (10.7mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Removing the rear wheel
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so
there is no danger of it falling over.
Drain
Refer to “FINAL GEAR OIL REPLACEMENT” in CHAPTER 3.
Refer to “FUEL TANK AND SEATS” in
CHAPTER 3.
Loosen
Final gear oil
Fuel tank and seats
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Rear fender assembly
Brake caliper bracket bolt
Bolts
Rear axle nut/washer
Rear axle end nuts/axle holder
Rear wheel assembly
Washer
Collar
1
4
1/1
2/1
1
1
1
6-11
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC
CHAS
62 Nm (6.2mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Rear wheel disassembly
Disassembling the rear wheel
Lock washers
Clutch hub
Dampers
O-rings
Oil seal
Bearing
Spacer
Bearing
2
1
6
2
1
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
6-12
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC
CHAS
EAS00562
REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that
the rear wheel is elevated.
2. Remove:
rear gear case fitting bolts
3. Remove:
brake caliper 1
brake caliper bracket bolt
NOTE:
Do not depress the brake pedai when removing
the brake caliper.
4. Remove:
wheel axle nut
washer
5. Remove:
rear axle end nut 2
6. Remove:
rear axle holder 3
7. Remove:
rear wheel
EAS00566
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Check:
wheel axle
rear wheel
wheel bearings
oil seals
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISCS”.
2. Check:
tire
Damage/wear Replace.
Refer to “CHECKING THE TIRES” and
“CHECKING THE WHEELS” in chapter 3.
3. Check:
spokes
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISCS”.
4. Measure:
rear wheel radial runout
rear wheel lateral runout
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISCS”.
6-13
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC
CHAS
EAS00567
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL DRIVE HUB
1. Check:
rear wheel drive hub
Cracks/damage Replace.
rear wheel drive hub dampers
Damage/wear Replace.
EAS00572
INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Lubricate:
drive shaft splines
Recommended lubricant
Molydenum disulfide grease
2. Lubricate:
wheel axle
wheel bearings
oil seal lips
Recommended lubricant
Lithium soap base grease
2. Install:
rear wheel assembly
a. Install the rear wheel assembly 1 with the
rear brake caliper bracket 2 and hold the
bracket to keep the specified position.
b. After installation of the rear axle shaft 3 ,
slide the wheel assembly to forward direction.
c. To make sure the caliper bracket mounts on
the swingarm and then, fix the holder of swingarm temporally.
NOTE:
The holder should installed with the punch mark
a facing upper.
d. Tighten the rear gear housing bolts, with specified tightening torque.
Rear gear housing bolt
90 Nm (9.0 mkg)
e. Tighten the nut of rear axle shaft with specified torque.
Wheel axle nut
107 Nm (10.7 mkg)
6-14
REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC
CHAS
f. Tighten the rear axle holder with specified
torque.
Rear axle end nut
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
g. Tighten the rear brake caliper bracket bolt
with specified tightening torque.
Brake caliper bracket bolt
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
h. Install the rear brake caliper on the bracket
and tighten the bolts with specified tightening
torque.
Brake caliper bolt
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
EAS00575
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC
BALANCE
NOTE:
After replacing the tire, wheel or both, the rear
wheel static balance should be adjusted.
Adjust the rear wheel static balance with the
brake disc and rear wheel drive hub installed.
1. Adjust:
rear wheel static balance
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
CISCS”.
6-15
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
FRONT BRAKE PADS
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Removing the front brake pads
Retaining bolt
Brake caliper
Brake pads
Pad spring
1
1
2
1
Refer to “REPLACING THE FRONT
BRAKE PADS”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-16
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
EAS00578
REAR BRAKE PADS
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISC”.
Removing the rear brake pads
Muffler
Muffler stay
Brake hose holder
Caliper
Cover
Clips
Pad pins
Pad spring
Brake pads
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
Refer to “REPLACING THE REAR
BRAKE PADS”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-17
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
EAS00579
CAUTION:
Disc brake components rarely require disassembly.
Therefore, always follow these preventive
measures:
Never disassemble brake components unless absolutely necessary.
If any connection on the hydraulic brake
system is disconnected, the entire brake
system must be disassembled, drained,
cleaned, properly filled, and bled after reassembly.
Never use solvents on internal brake components.
Use only clean or new brake fluid for cleaning brake components.
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean
up any spilt fluid immediately.
Avoid brake fluid coming into contact with
the eyes as it can cause serious injury.
First aid for brake fluid entering the eyes:
Flush with water for 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
EAS00582
REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS
The following procedure applies to both brake
calipers.
NOTE:
When replacing the brake pads, it is not necessary to disconnect the brake hose or disassemble the brake caliper.
1. Remove:
brake hose holder
retaining bolt 1
6-18
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
2. Remove:
brake pads 1
(along with the brake pad shims)
3. Measure:
brake pad wear limit a
Out of specification Replace the brake
pads as a set.
Brake pad wear limit
0.8 mm
4. Install:
brake pad shims
(onto the brake pads)
brake pads
brake pad spring
NOTE:
Always install new brake pads, brake pad
shims, and a brake pad spring as a set.
a. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly to the
bleed screw 2 . Put the other end of the hose
into an open container.
b. Loosen the bleed screw and push the brake
caliper pistons into the brake caliper with
your finger.
c. Tighten the bleed screw.
Bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 mkg)
d. Install new brake pad shims onto the new
brake pads.
e. Install new brake pads and a new brake pad
spring.
5. Install:
brake caliper
retaining bolt
6-19
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
6. Check:
brake fluid level
Below the minimum lever mark a Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” in chapter 3.
7. Check:
brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
EAS00583
REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS
NOTE:
When replacing the brake pads, it is not necessary to disconnect the brake hose or disassemble the brake caliper.
1. Remove:
brake hose holder 1
brake caliper 2
2. Remove:
brake pad cover
brake pad clips
brake pad pins
brake pad spring
3. Remove:
brake pads
(along with the brake pad shims)
4. Measure:
brake pad wear limit a
Out of specification Replace the brake
pads as a set.
Brake pad wear limit
0.5 mm
6-20
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
5. Install:
brake pad shims
(onto the brake pads)
brake pads
brake pad spring
NOTE:
Always install new brake pads, brake pad
shims, and a brake pad spring as a set.
a. Connect a clear plastic hose 1 tightly to the
bleed screw 2 . Put the other end of the hose
into an open container.
b. Loosen the bleed screw and push the brake
caliper pistons into the brake caliper with
your finger.
c. Tighten the bleed screw.
Bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 mkg)
d. Install new brake pad shims onto the new
brake pads.
e. Install new brake pads and a new brake pad
spring.
NOTE:
The longer tangs a on the brake pad spring
must point in the direction of disc rotation.
6. Install:
brake pad pins
brake pad clips
brake pad cover
brake caliper
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
7. Check:
brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” in chapter 3.
8. Check:
brake pedal operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
6-21
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Job name/Part name
Removing the front brake master
cylinder.
Brake fluid
Rear view mirror (right)
Brake lever/compression spring
Front brake switch
Union bolt
Copper washers
Brake hose
Master cylinder bracket
Master cylinder
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Drain
1
1/1
1
1
2
1
1
1
6-22
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE
FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER”.
Reter to “INSTALLING THE FRONT
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
Order
1
2
3
4
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
CHAS
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Disassembling the front brake
master cylinder
Dust boot
Circlip
Master cylinder cup
Spring
1
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
6-23
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
EAS00586
REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
64 Nm (6.4 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Job name/Part name
Removing the rear brake master
cylinder
Brake fluid
Brake switch connector
Cotter pin/washer
Pin
Bolts
Brake pedal assembly
Union bolt
Copper washers/brake hose
Clips/reservoir hose
Master cylinder assembly
Reservoir tank
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
1
1/1
1
2
1
1
2/1
2/1
1
1
Drain
Disconnect
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE
REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER”.
For installation, reverse removal
procedure.
6-24
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
1
2
3
4
Disassembling the rear brake master
cylinder
Master cylinder boot
Circlip
Master cylinder cup
Spring
CHAS
Remarks
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
1
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
6-25
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
EAS00588
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
NOTE:
Before removing the front brake master cylinder, drain the brake fluid from the entire brake
system.
1. Remove:
rear view mirror (right)
brake lever/compression spring
brake switch 1
2. Remove:
union bolt 2
copper washers
brake hose 3
NOTE:
To collect any remaining brake fluid, place a
container under the master cylinder and the end
of the brake hose.
3. Remove:
master cylinder bracket
master cylinder
EAS00589
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
NOTE:
Before removing the rear brake master cylinder,
drain the brake fluid from the entire brake system.
1. Remove:
brake switch connector
cotter pin/washer
pin
bolt/brake pedal assembly
2. Remove:
union bolt 1
copper washers 2
brake hose 3
NOTE:
To collect any remaining brake fluid, place a
container under the master cylinder and the end
of the brake hose.
3. Remove:
clips/reservoir hose
master cylinder assembly
6-26
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
A
B
A
B
CHAS
EAS00592
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE
MASTER CYLINDERS
The following procedure applies to the both of
the brake master cylinders.
1. Check:
brake master cylinder 1
Damage/scratches/wear Replace.
brake fluid delivery passages 2
(brake master cylinder body)
Obstruction Blow out with compressed air.
A Front
B Rear
2. Check:
brake master cylinder kit 1
Damage/scratches/wear Replace.
A Front
B Rear
A
3. Check:
brake fluid reservoir 1
Cracks/damage Replace.
brake fluid reservoir diaphragm 2
Cracks/damage Replace.
A Front
B Rear
B
4. Check:
brake hoses 1
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
6-27
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
EAS00598
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
WARNING
Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated
with clean or new brake fluid.
Never use solvents on internal brake components.
Recommended brake fluid
DOT 4
1. Install:
brake master cylinder 1
brake master cylinder bracket 2
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
NOTE:
Install the brake master cylinder bracket with
the “UP” mark facing up.
Align the end of the brake master cylinder holder with the punch mark a on the handlebar.
First, tighten the upper bolt, then the lower bolt.
2. Install:
copper washers (New) 1
brake hose 2
union bolt 3
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
WARNING
Proper brake hose routing is essential to insure safe motorcycle operation. Refer to
“CABLE ROUTING”.
NOTE:
While holding the brake hose, tighten the
union bolt as shown.
Turn the handlebar to the left and to the right to
make sure that the brake hose does not touch
other parts (e. g., wire harness, cables, leads).
Correct if necessary.
3. Fill:
brake master cylinder reservoir
(with the specified amount of the recommended brake fluid)
Recommended brake fluid
DOT 4
6-28
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
WARNING
Use only the designated brake fluid.
Other brake fluids may cause the rubber
seals to deteriorate, causing leakage and
poor brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluid that
is already in the system. Mixing brake
fluids may result in a harmful chemical
reaction, leading to poor brake performance.
When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the reservoir. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the brake
fluid and could cause vapor lock.
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean
up any spilt brake fluid immediately.
4. Bleed:
brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
5. Check:
brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” in chapter 3.
6. Check:
brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
6-29
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
EAS00610
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
1. Install:
copper washers (New)
brake hose
Union bolt
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
WARNING
Proper brake hose routing is essential to insure safe motorcycle operation. Refer to
“CABLE ROUTING”.
CAUTION:
When installing the brake hose onto the brake
master cylinder make sure that the brake pipe
touches the projections a as shown.
2. Fill:
brake fluid reservoir
(to the maximum level mark)
Recommended brake fluid
DOT 4
WARNING
Use only the designated brake fluid. Other
brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to
deteriorate, causing leakage and poor
brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluid that is
already in the system. Mixing brake fluids
may result in a harmful chemical reaction,
leading to poor brake performance.
When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the reservoir. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the brake
fluid and could cause vapor lock.
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean
up any spilt brake fluid immediately.
3. Bleed:
brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
4. Check:
brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” in chapter 3.
6-30
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
5. Adjust:
brake pedal position a
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE”
in chapter 3.
Brake pedal position (below the
top of the rider footrest)
81.8 mm
6. Adjust:
rear brake light operation timing
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
LIGHT SWITCH” in chapter 3.
6-31
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS
6 Nm (0.6 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Drain
Removing the front brake calipers
Brake fluid
Brake hose holder
Union bolt
Copper washers
Brake hose
Retaining bolt
Brake caliper assembly
1
1
2
1
1
1
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-32
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
Order
1
2
3
4
5
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
CHAS
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Disassembling the front brake
calipers
Pad spring
Brake caliper pistons
Dust seals
Caliper piston seals
Bleed screw
1
2
2
2
1
Refer to “REMOVING THE FRONT
BRAKE CALIPERS”.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
6-33
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
ESA00616
REAR BRAKE CALIPER
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISC”.
Drain
Removing the rear brake caliper
Muffler
Muffler stay
Brake fluid
Brake hose holder
Union bolt
Copper washers
Brake hose
Caliper ass’y
1
1
2
1
1
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-34
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Disassembling the rear brake caliper
Cover
Clips
Pad pins
Pad spring
Brake pads
Caliper pistons
Dust seals
Piston seals
Bleed screw
CHAS
Remarks
Disassembly the parts in the order listed.
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE REAR
BRAKE CALIPER”.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
6-35
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
EAS00624
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS
The following procedure applies to both of the
brake calipers.
NOTE:
Before removing either brake caliper, drain the
brake fluid from the entire brake system.
1. Remove:
brake hose holder
union bolt 1
copper washers 2
brake hose
NOTE:
Put the end of the brake hose into a container
and pump out the brake fluid carefully.
2. Remove:
brake caliper pistons 1
brake caliper piston seals 2
a. Blow compressed air into the brake hose
joint opening to force out the pistons from the
brake caliper.
WARNING
Cover the brake caliper piston with a rag.
Be carful not to get injured when the piston
is expelled from the brake caliper cylinder.
Never try to pry out the brake caliper pistons.
b. Remove the brake caliper piston seals.
EAS00628
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER
NOTE:
Before removing the brake caliper, drain the
brake fluid from the entire brake system.
6-36
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
1. Remove:
union bolt 1
copper wachers 2
brake hose
NOTE:
Put the end of the brake hose into a container
and pump out the brake fluid carefully.
2. Remove:
brake caliper pistons 1
brake caliper pistons seals 2
a. Secure the right side brake caliper piston
with a piece of wood a .
b. Blow compressed air into the brake hose
joint opening b to force out the left side piston from the brake caliper.
WARNING
Never try to pry out the brake caliper pistons.
Do not loosen the bolts.
c. Remove the brake caliper piston seals.
d. Repeat the previous steps to force out the
right side piston from the brake caliper.
EAS00633
CHECKING THE FRONT AND REAR BRAKE
CALIPERS
Recommended brake component
replacement schedule:
6-37
Brake pads
If necessary
Piston seals
Every two years
Brake hoses
Every two years
Brake fluid
Every two years and
whenever the brake
is disassembled.
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
1. Check:
brake caliper pistons 1
Rust/scratches/wear Replace the brake
caliper piston assembly.
brake caliper cylinders 2
Scratches/wear Replace the brake caliper.
brake calipers 3
Cracks/damage Replace.
brake fluid delivery passages
(brake caliper body)
Obstruction Blow out with compressed air.
A
B
WARNING
Whenever a brake caliper is disassembled,
replace the brake caliper piston seals.
A Front
B Rear
2. Check:
brake caliper brackets
Cracks/damage Replace.
EAS00638
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS
The following procedure applies to both of the
brake calipers.
WARNING
Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated
with clean or new brake fluid.
Never use solvents on internal brake components as they will cause the piston seals
to swell and distort.
Whenever a brake caliper is disassembled,
replace the brake caliper piston seals.
Recommended brake fluid
DOT 4
6-38
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
1. Install:
brake caliper 1
(temporarily)
copper washers (New) 2
brake hose 3
union bolt 4
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
WARNING
Proper brake hose routing is essential to insure safe motorcycle operation. Refer to
“CABLE ROUTING”.
CAUTION:
When installing the brake hose onto the brake
caliper 1 , make sure that the brake pipe
touches the projection a on the brake caliper.
2. Install:
brake caliper retaining bolt
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
brake hose holder
Refer to “FRONT BRAKE PADS”.
3. Fill:
brake master cylinder reservoir
(with the specified amount of the recommended brake fluid)
Recommended brake fluid
DOT 4
WARNING
Use only the designated brake fluid. Other
brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to
deteriorate, causing leakage and poor
brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluid that is
already in the system. Mixing brake fluids
may result in a harmful chemical reaction,
leading to poor brake performance.
When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the reservoir. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the brake
fluid and could cause vapor lock.
6-39
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean
up any spilt brake fluid immediately.
4. Bleed:
brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
5. Check:
brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” in chapter 3.
6. Check:
brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
EAS00642
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER
WARNING
Before installaiton, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated
with clean or new brake fluid.
Never use solvents on internal brake components as they will cause the piston seals
to swell and distort.
Whenever a brake caliper is disassembled,
replace the brake caliper piston seals.
Recommended brake fluid
DOT 4
6-40
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
1. Install:
brake caliper 1
(temporarily)
copper washers New
brake hose 2
union bolt 3
CHAS
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
WARNING
Proper brake hose routing is essential to insure safe motorcycle operation. Refer to
“CABLE ROUTING”.
CAUTION:
When installing the brake hose onto the
brake caliper 1 , make sure that the brake
pipe a touches the projection b on the copper washer.
2. Install:
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
brake caliper
brake hose holder
Refer to “REAR BRAKE PADS”.
3. Fill:
brake fluid reservoir
(with the specified amount of the recommended brake fluid)
Recommended brake fluid
DOT 4
WARNING
Use only the designated brake fluid. Other
brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to
deteriorate, causing leakage and poor
brake performance.
Refill with the same type of brake fluid that
is already in the system. Mixing brake
fluids may result in a farmful chemical
reaction, leading to poor brake performance.
When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the brake fluid reservoir. Water
will signicantly lower the boiling point of
the brake fluid and could cause vapor lock.
6-41
FRONT AND REAR BRAKES
CHAS
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean
up any spilt brake fluid immediately.
4. Bleed:
brake system
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.
Make sure that the motorcycle is upright.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
5. Check:
brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark a Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” in chapter 3.
6. Check:
brake pedal operation
Soft or spongy feeling bleed the brake system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” in chapter 3.
6-42
FRONT FORK
CHAS
FRONT FORK
20 Nm (2.0 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Q’ty
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISCS”.
Removing the front fork
Front wheel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Remarks
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
Brake hose holders
Brake caliper assembly
Front fender
Turn signal light bolts
Upper bracket bolts
Cap bolts
Lower bracket bolts
Front fork legs
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING
THE FRONT FORK LEGS”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-43
FRONT FORK
CHAS
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Job name/Part name
Disassembling the front fork
Cap bolt
O-ring
Spacer
Spring seat
Fork spring
Dust seal
Oil seal clip
Damper rod bolt
Copper washer
Damper rod/rebound spring
Oil seal
Q’ty
Remarks
Disassemble the parts in the order listed.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/1
1
6-44
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS”.
FRONT FORK
CHAS
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
Order
12
13
14
15
16
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Seal spacer
Outer tube bushing
Inner tube/inner tube bushing
Oil lock piece
Outer tube
1
1
1/1
1
1
Remarks
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING/ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS”.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
6-45
FRONT FORK
CHAS
EAS00649
REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that
the front wheel is elevated.
2. Loosen:
upper bracket pinch bolt 1
cap bolt 2
turn signal light bolt 3
lower bracket pinch bolt 4
WARNING
Before loosening the upper and lower
bracket pinch bolts, support the front fork
leg.
3. Remove:
front fork leg
EAS00653
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
1. Remove:
cap bolt
O-ring
spacer
spring seat
fork spring
2. Drain
fork oil
3. Remove:
dust seal 1
oil seal clip 2
(with a flat-head screwdriver)
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the inner tube.
6-46
FRONT FORK
CHAS
NOTE:
Do not remove the front fork leg protector from
the outer tube.
If the front fork leg protector must be removed,
always install a new one.
4. Remove:
damper rod bolt
copper washer
NOTE:
While holding the damper rod with the T-handle
1 and damper rod holder 2 , loosen the damper rod bolt 3 .
T-handle
90890-01326
Damper rod holder
90890-01460
6. Remove:
inner tube
a. Hold the front fork leg horizontally.
b. Slowly push A the inner tube into the outer
tube and just before it bottoms out, pull B the
inner tube back quickly.
c. Repeat this step until the inner tube separates from the outer tube.
EAS00657
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
1. Check:
inner tube 1
outer tube 2
Bends/damage/scratches Replace.
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten a bent inner
tube as this may dangerously weaken it.
2. Measure:
spring free length a
Over the specified limit Replace.
Spring free length limit
350 mm
6-47
FRONT FORK
CHAS
3. Check:
damper rod 1
Damage/wear Replace.
Obstruction Blow out all of the oil passages with compressed air.
oil lock piece 2
Damage Replace.
CAUTION:
When disassembling and assembling the
front fork leg, do not allow any foreign material to enter the front fork.
4. Check:
cap bolt
O-ring
Damage/wear Replace.
EAS00659
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
WARNING
Make sure that the oil levels both front fork
legs are equal.
Uneven oil levels can result in poor handling and a loss of stability.
NOTE:
When assembling the front fork leg, be sure to
replace the following parts:
–inner tube bushing
–outer tube bushing
–oil seal
–dust seal
Before assembling the front fork leg, make
sure that all of the components are clean.
1. Install:
damper rod 1
oil lock piece 2
WARNING
Always use new copper washers.
CAUTION:
Allow the damper rod to slide slowly down
the inner tube 3 until it protrudes from the
bottom of the inner tube. Be careful not to
damage the inner tube.
6-48
FRONT FORK
CHAS
2. Lubricate:
inner tube’s outer surface
Recommended lubricant
Yamaha fork and shock oil
10 W or equivalent
3. Tighten:
damper rod bolt 1
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
NOTE:
While holding the damper rod with the T-handle
1 and damper rod holder 2 , tighten the damper rod bolt 3 .
T-handle
90890-01326
Damper rod holder
90890-01460
4. Install:
outer tube bushing 1
seal spacer
(with the fork seal driver weight 2 and adapter 3 )
Fork seal driver weight
90890-01367
Adapter
90890-01381
5. Install:
oil seal 1
(with the fork seal driver weight and adapter)
CAUTION:
Make sure that the numbered side of the oil
seal faces up.
NOTE:
Before installing the oil seal, apply lithium soap
base grease onto its lips.
6. Install:
oil seal clip 1
NOTE:
Adjust the oil seal clip so that it fits into the outer
tube groove.
6-49
FRONT FORK
CHAS
7. Install:
dust seal 1
(with the fork seal driver weight)
8. Fill:
front fork leg
(with the specified amount of the recommended fork oil)
Quantity (each front fork leg)
0.464 L
Recommended oil
Yamaha fork and shock oil 10W
or equivalent
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the recommended fork oil.
Other oils may have an adverse effect on
front fork performance.
When disassembling and assembling the
front fork leg, do not allow any foreign material to enter the front fork.
9. After filling the front fork leg, slowly stroke the
inner tube up and down (at least ten times) to
distribute the fork oil.
NOTE:
Be sure to stroke the inner tube slowly because
the fork oil may spurt out.
10. Measure:
front fork leg oil level a
Out of specification Correct.
Front fork leg oil level (from the
top of the inner tube, with the
inner tube fully compressed,
and without the spring)
108 mm
NOTE:
Hold the fork in an upright position.
11. Install:
fork spring
spring seat
spacer
O-ring
cap bolt
6-50
FRONT FORK
CHAS
NOTE:
Install the fork spring with its smaller pitch upword.
Before installing the cap bolt, apply grease to
the O-ring.
Temporarily tighten the cap bolt.
EAS00662
INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The fllowing procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
1. Install:
front fork leg
Temporarily tighten the upper and lower
bracket pinch bolts.
NOTE:
Make sure that the inner fork tube is flush with
the top of the upper bracket.
2. Tighten:
lower bracket pinch bolt 1
30 Nm (3.0 mkg)
front turn signal light bolt 2
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
cap bolt 3
upper bracket pinch bolt 4
20 Nm (2.0m kg)
WARNING
Make sure that the brake hoses are routed
properly.
6-51
HANDLEBAR
CHAS
HANDLEBAR
28 Nm (2.8 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
32 Nm (3.2 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Removing the handlebar
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so
that there is no danger of it falling over.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Plastic locking ties
Clutch cable
Clutch switch lead
Starter cable
Handlebar switch (left)
Grip (left)
Clutch lever assembly
Master cylinder bracket
Master cylinder assembly
Handlebar switch (right)
Throttle cables
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
6-52
Refer to “INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR”.
Refer to “REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR”.
Refer to “INSTALLING THE
HANDLEBAR”.
HANDLEBAR
CHAS
28 Nm (2.8 mkg)
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
32 Nm (3.2 mkg)
Order
12
13
14
15
16
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
1
2
1
1
2
Throttle grip assembly
Handlebar holders (upper)
Handlebar
Cable guide
Handlebar holders (lower)
Remarks
Refer to “INSTALLING THE
HANDLEBAR”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-53
HANDLEBAR
CHAS
EAS00666
REMOVING THE HANDLEBAR
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
2. Remove:
handlebar grip (left) 1
NOTE:
Blow compressed air between the handlebar
and the handlebar grip, and gradually push the
grip off the handlebar.
EAS00668
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
2. Check:
handlebar 1
Bends/cracks/damage Replace.
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten a bent handlebar as this may dangerously weaken it.
3. Install:
handlebar grip
6-54
HANDLEBAR
CHAS
a. Apply a light coat of rubber adhesive onto the
left end of the handlebar.
b. Slide the handlebar grip over the left end of
the handlebar.
c. Wipe off any excess rubber adhesive with a
clean rag.
WARNING
Do not touch the handlebar grip until the
rubber adhesive has fully dried.
EAS00670
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
2. Install:
handlebar
upper handlebar holders
28 Nm (2.8 mkg)
CAUTION:
First, tighten the bolts on the front side of
the handlebar holder, then on the rear side.
Turn the handlebar all the way to the left
and right. If there is any contact with the
fuel tank, adjust the handlebar position.
NOTE:
The upper handlebar holders should be
installed with the punch mark a facing forward
A.
6-55
HANDLEBAR
CHAS
Align the match marks b on the handlebar
with the upper surface of the lower handlebar
holders.
3. Install:
throttle grip
throttle cable
WARNING
Make sure that the pin a on the throttle
cable housing is aligned with the hole b in
the handlebar.
4. Install:
master cylinder
Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES”.
5. Install:
clutch lever holder 1
NOTE:
Align the slit in the clutch lever holder with the
punch mark a in the handlebar.
6. Install:
left handlebar switch 1
NOTE:
Aligh the matching surface on the handlebar
switches with the punch mark a on the handlebar.
7. Install:
clutch cable
8. Connect:
clutch switch coupler
NOTE:
Apply a thin coat of lithium soap base grease
onto the end of the clutch cable.
6-56
HANDLEBAR
CHAS
9. Adjust:
clutch cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH
CABLE FREE PLAY” in chapter 3.
Clutch cable free play (at the end
of the clutch lever)
5 10 mm
10. Adjust:
throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE
CABLE FREE PLAY” in chapter 3.
Throttle cable free play (at the
flange of the throttle grip)
4 6 mm
6-57
CHAS
STEERING HEAD
STEERING HEAD
1st 52 Nm (5.2 mkg)
2nd 18 Nm (1.8 mkg)
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Removing the lower bracket
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so
that there is no danger of it falling over.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Front fork legs
Handlebar
Headlight lens unit
Leads (in the headlight body)
Front turn signal light (left/right)
Headlight body
Brake hose joint holder
Upper bracket
Lock washer
Upper ring nut
Refer to “FRONT FORK”.
Refer to “HANDLEBAR”.
1
–
1/1
1
1
1
1
1
6-58
Disconnect
CHAS
STEERING HEAD
1st 52 Nm (5.2 mkg)
2nd 18 Nm (1.8 mkg)
110 Nm (11.0 mkg)
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rubber washer
Lower ring nut
Bearing cover
Lower bracket
Bearing (upper)
Rubber seal
Bearing (lower)
Remarks
Refer to “REMOVING THE LOWER
BRACKET/INSTALLING THE
STEERING HEAD”.
For installaiton, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-59
STEERING HEAD
CHAS
EAS00677
REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
2. Remove:
upper ring nut 1
lower ring nut 2
NOTE:
Hold the lower ring nut with the exhaust and
steering nut wrench, then remove the upper ring
nut with the ring nut wrench.
Exhaust and steering nut wrench
90890-01268
Ring nut wrench
90890-01403
WARNING
Securely support the lower bracket so that
there is no danger of it falling.
EAS00681
CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD
1. Wash:
bearings
bearing races
Recommended cleaning solvent
Kerosine
2. Check
bearings 1
bearing races 2
Damage/pitting Replace.
3. Replace:
bearings
bearing races
6-60
STEERING HEAD
CHAS
a. Remove the bearing reces from the steering
head pipe with a long rod 1 and hammer.
b. Remove the bearing race from the lower
bracket with a floor chisel 2 and hammer.
c. Install a new rubber seal and new bearing reces.
CAUTION:
If the bearing race is not installed properly,
the steering head pipe could be damaged.
NOTE:
Always replace the bearings and bearing
races as a set.
Whenever the steering head is disassembled,
replace the rubber seal.
4. Check:
upper bracket
lower bracket
(along with the steering stem)
Bends/cracks/damage Replace.
EAS00683
INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD
1. Lubricate:
upper bearing
lower bearing
bearing races
Recommended lubricant
Lithium soap base grease
2. Install:
Lower ring nut 1
rubber washer 2
upper ring nut 3
lock washer 4
Refer to “CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
THE STEERING HEAD” in chapter 3.
3. Install:
upper bracket
steering stem nut
6-61
STEERING HEAD
CHAS
NOTE:
Temporarily tighten the steering stem nut.
4. Install:
front fork legs
Refer to “FRONT FORK”
NOTE:
Temporarily tighten the upper and lower bracket
pinch bolts.
6-62
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
CHAS
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
RIGHT SIDE COVER AND BATTERY BOX
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
Refer to “FUEL TANK AND SEATS” in
CHAPTER 3.
Refer to “REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISC”.
Removing the right side cover and
battery box.
Seats
Muffler assembly
1
2
3
Battery cover
Right side cover
Battery
1
1
1
4
Battery box
1
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-63
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
CHAS
LEFT SIDE COVER AND TOOL BOX
7 Nm (0.7 mkg)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in order listed.
Removing the left side cover and
tool box
Tool box cover
Left side cover
Owner’s tool kit
Connector’s
Fuel hose holder
Fuel hoses
Tool box
1
1
1
–
1
2
1
Disconnect
Disconnect
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-64
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
CHAS
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
90 Nm (9.0 mkg)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remove the parts in order listed.
Removing the rear shock absorber
and swingarm
Rear wheel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Remarks
Refer to “REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISC”.
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
Connecting arm bolts
Connecting arms
Rear shock absorber lower bolt
Rear shock absorber
Relay arm
Pivot shaft
Swingarm
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY”.
Refer to “REMOVING/INSTALLING THE
SWINGARM”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-65
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
CHAS
EAS00687
HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
AND GAS CYLINDER
WARNING
This rear shock absorber and gas cylinder
contain highly compressed nitrogen gas.
Before handling the rear shock absorber or
gas cylinder, read and make sure you understand the following information. The
manufacturer cannot be held responsible
for property damage or personal injury that
may result from improper handling of the
rear shock absorber and gas cylinder.
Do not tamper or attempt to open the rear
shock absorber or gas cylinder.
Do not subject the rear shock absorber or
gas cylinder to an open flame or any other
source of high heat. High heat can cause an
explosion due to excessive gas pressure.
Do not deform or damage the rear shock
absorber or gas cylinder in any way. If the
rear shock absorber, gas cylinder or both
are damaged, damping performance will
suffer.
EAS00689
DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND GAS CYLINDER
a. Gas pressure must be released before disposing of a rear shock absorber and gas cylinder.To release the gas pressure, drill a
2 3 mm hole through the gas cylinder at a
point 15 – 20 mm from its end as shown.
WARNING
Wear eye protection to prevent eye damage
from released gas or metal chips.
6-66
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
CHAS
EAS00694
REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that
the rear wheel is elevated.
2. Disconnect:
battery leads
(from the battery terminals)
CAUTION:
First, disconnect the negative lead 1 , then
the positive lead 2 .
3. Remove:
connecting arm bolt(swingarm side) 1
rear shock absorber assembly lower bolt
NOTE:
While removing the connecting arm bolt (swingarm side), hold the swingarm so that it does not
drop down.
4. Remove:
rear shock absorber upper bolt
rear shock absorber
6-67
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
CHAS
EAS00702
REMOVING THE SWINGARM
1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so that
there is no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so that
the rear wheel is elevated.
2. Remove:
rear shock absorber
3. Check:
swingarm side play
swingarm vertical movement
a. Check the tightening torque of the swingarm
pivot bolts and locknut.
Locknut
90 Nm (9.0 mkg)
b. Check the swingarm side play A by moving
the swingarm from side to side.
c. If the swingarm side play is out of specification, check the spacers and bearings.
Swingarm side play (at the end
of the swingarm)
0 mm
d. Check the swingarm vertical movement B
by moving the swingarm up and down.
If swingarm vertical movement is not smooth
or if there is binding, check the spacers and
bearings.
6-68
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
CHAS
EAS00696
CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY AND GAS CYLINDER
1. Check:
rear shock absorber rod
Bends/damage Replace the rear shock
absorber assembly.
rear shock absorber
Gas leaks/oil leaks Replace the rear
shock absorber assembly.
spring
Damage/wear Replace the rear shock absorber assembly.
gas cylinder
Damage/gas leaks Replace.
bushings
Damage/wear Replace.
dust seals
Damage/wear Replace.
bolts
Bends/damage/wear Replace.
EAS00708
CHECKING THE SWINGARM
1. Check:
swingarm
Bends/cracks/damage Replace.
2. Check:
pivot shaft
Damage/wear Replace.
3. Check:
collars 1
oilseals 2
bearings 3
Damage/wear Replace.
6-69
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
CHAS
EAS00698
INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
1. Install:
swingarm
Refer to “INSTALLING THE SWINGARM”.
2. Lubricate:
spacers
bearings
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide grease
3. Install:
rear shock absorber assembly
Rear shock absorber assembly
upper nut
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
Rear shock absorber assembly
lower nut
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Relay-arm-to-frame-nut
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
NOTE:
When installing the rear shock absorber assembly, lift up the swingarm.
Install the connecting arm front bolt from the
right.
4. Connect:
battery leads
(to the battery terminals)
CAUTION:
First, connect the positive lead 1 , then the
negative lead 2 .
EAS00712
INSTALLING THE SWINGARM
1. Lubricate:
bearings
spacers
oil seals
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide grease
6-70
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER AND SWINGARM
CHAS
2. Install:
relay arm
left connecting arm
right connecting arm
Rear-shock-absorber-assembly
lower nut 1
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Connecting arm nuts 2
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
Relay-arm-to-frame-nut 3
48 Nm (4.8 mkg)
3. Install:
rear shock absorber
Reter to “INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK
ABSORBER ASSEMBLY”.
4. Install:
rear wheel
Refer to “REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISC”.
6-71
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
SHAFT DRIVE
EAS00715
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following conditions may indicate damaged shaft drive components:
A
Symptoms
B
1. A pronounced hesitation or jerky movement
during acceleration, deceleration, or sustained speeds. (not to be confused with engine
surging or transmissionrelated
movements.)
2. A rolling “rumble” noticeable at low speeds, a
high-pitched whine, or a “clunk” from a shaft
drive component or vicinity of the shaft drive.
3. The shaft drive is locked up or no power is
transmitted from the engine to the rear wheel
Possible causes
A. Bearing damage
B. Improper gear lash
C.Damaged gear teeth
D.Broken drive shaft
E. Broken gear teeth
F. Seizure due to lack of lubrication
G.Small foreign objects lodged between moving
parts
NOTE:
Causes A, B and C may be extremely difficult to diagnose. The symptoms are quite subtle and difficult
to distinguish from normal operating noises. If there is reason to believe these components are damaged, remove them for individual inspection.
6-72
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
Inspection notes
1. Investigate any unusual noises.
The following noises may indicate a mechanical defect:
a. A rolling “rumble” during coasting, acceleration, or deceleration, (increases with the rear
wheel speed, but does not increase with
higher engine or transmission speeds).
Diagnosis: Possible wheel bearing damage.
b. A whining noise that varies with acceleration
and deceleration.
Diagnosis: Possible incorrect reassembly or
too little gear lash.
WARNING
Insufficient gear lash is extremely destructive to the gear teeth. If a test ride, following
reassembly, indicates these symptoms,
stop riding immediately to minimize gear
damage.
c. A slight “clunk” evident at low speed operation. (not to be confused with normal motorcycle operation)
Diagnosis: Possible broken gear teeth
WARNING
Stop riding immediately if broken gear teeth
are suspected. This condition could result
in the shaft drive assembly locking up, causing a loss of control and possible injury to
the rider.
6-73
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
EAS00716
Troubleshooting chart
When causes A and B shown in the chart at the beginning of the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section exist,
check the following points:
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so
that the front wheel is elevated and then spin
the front wheel. Is the wheel bearing damaged?
YES
Replace the wheel bearing.
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISC”.
NO
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so
that the rear wheel is elevated and then spin
the rear wheel. Is the wheel bearing damaged?
NO
Rear wheel bearings and shaft drive bearings
are probably not damaged.
Repeat the test or remove and check the
components.
YES
Remove the rear wheel. Is the wheel bearing
damaged?
YES
NO
Remove and inspect the drive shaft components.
6-74
Replace the rear wheel bearing.
Refer to “REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE DISC”.
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
EAS00717
CHECKING THE FINAL DRIVE OIL FOR
CONTAMINATION AND INSPECTING THE
SHAFT DRIVE FOR LEAKS
1. Drain:
final drive oil
(from the final drive housing)
Refer to “CHARGING THE FINAL DRIVE
OIL” in chapter 3.
2. Check:
final drive oil
Large amount of metal particles Check for
bearing seizure.
NOTE:
A small amount of metal particles in the final
drive oil is normal.
3. Check:
shaft drive housing
(for oil leaks)
a. Thoroughly clean the entire motorcycle and
then completely dry it.
b. Apply a leak-locating compound or dry powder spray to the shaft drive.
c. Test ride the motorcycle long enough to locate a leak.
Oil leak Repair or replace the faulty
part(-s).
1 Oil seal
2 O-ring
3 Forward
NOTE:
What may appear to be an oil leak on a new or
fairly new motorcycle, may result from the application of a rust preventive coating or excessive seal lubrication.
Always clean the motorcycle and recheck the
area where the leak is thought to originate
from.
6-75
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
EAS00719
MEASURING THE RING GEAR BACKLASH
1. Secure the final drive assembly in a vise.
2. Remove:
final drive oil drain bolt
3. Drain:
final drive oil
(from the final drive assembly)
4. Measure:
ring gear backlash
Out of specification Adjust.
Ring gear backlash
0.1 0.2 mm
1.5 mm
a. Install a bolt 1 of the specified size, into the
final drive oil filler hole.
b. Finger tighten the bolt until it stops the ring
gear from moving.
25 mm
11 mm
14 mm
NOTE:
Do not overtighten the bolt.
100 mm
c. Install the final gear backlash band 2 and
dial gauge 3
Final gear backlash band
90890-01230
a Dial-gauge-plunger contact point: 54.5 mm
d. Gently rotate the gear coupling from engagement to engagement.
e. Record the reading on the dial gauge.
f. Remove the dial gauge, special tool, and
bolt.
a
6-76
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
g. Rotate the final drive pinion gear 90_.
h. Reinstall the bolt, special tool, and dial
gauge.
i. Repeat steps (d) to (h) three more times (for
a total of four measurements).
j. If any of the readings are over specification,
adjust the ring gear backlash.
EAS00720
ADJUSTING THE RING GEAR BACKLASH
1. Remove:
_ ring gear bearing housing nuts
_ ring gear bearing housing bolts
NOTE:
Working in a crisscross pattern, loosen each nut
1/4 of a turn. After all of the nuts are fully loosened, remove them and the bolts.
2. Remove:
_ ring gear bearing housing 1
_ ring gear 2
_ thrust washer 3
_ ring gear shim(-s) 4
3. Adjust:
_ ring gear backlash
a. Use the following chart to select the suitable
shim(-s) and thrust washer.
6-77
Thinner shim
Ring gear backlash is
increased.
Thicker shim
Ring gear backlash is
decreased.
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
b. If it is necessary to increase the ring gear
backlash by more than 0.2 mm, reduce the
thrust washer thickness by 0.2 mm for every
0.2 mm increase of ring gear shim thickness.
c. If it is necessary to reduce the ring gear backlash by more than 0.2 mm, increase the
thrust washer thickness by 0.2 mm for every
0.2 mm decrease of ring gear shim thickness.
Rig gear shims
Thickness (mm)
0.25, 0.30, 0.40
Thrust washers
Thickness (mm)
6-78
1.2, 1.4, 1.6, 1.8, 2.0
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY AND DRIVE SHAFT
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
115 Nm (11.5 mkg)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
130 Nm (13.0 mkg)
42 Nm (4.2 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Removing the final drive assembly
and drive shaft.
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.
WARNING
Securely support the motorcycle so
there is no danger of it falling over.
Rear wheel assembly
Refer to “REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISC”.
1
2
3
Collar
Drive shaft assembly
Final drive pinion gear assembly
1
1
1
4
Final gear assembly
1
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE FINAL
DRIVE ASSEMBLY/ALIGNING THE
FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR AND RING
GEAR”.
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
6-79
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
FINAL GEAR
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
Order
Job name/Part name
1
2
Disassembling the final gear.
Bolts (bearing housing)
Nuts (bearing housing)
3
4
5
6
Bearing housing/O-ring
Ring gear
Shim (s)
Thrust washer
Q’ty
2
6
Remarks
Disassemble the parts in the order listed.
NOTE:
Working in a crisscross pattern, loosen
each bolt and nut 1/4 of a turn. After all
the bolts and nuts are loosened, remove
them.
1/1
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.
6-80
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
EAS00724
DISASSEMBLING THE FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1. Remove:
ring gear bearing housing nuts
ring gear bearing housing bolts
NOTE:
Working in a crisscross pattern, loosen each
bolts and nuts 1/4 of a turn. After all of the bolts
and nuts are fully loosened, and remove them.
2. Remove:
self-locking nut
gear coupling
(with the special tool 1 )
Coupling gear/middle shaft tool
90890-01229
3. Remove:
bearing retainer 2
(with the special tool 3 )
Bearing retainer wrench
90890-04077
CAUTION:
The bearing retainer has left-hand threads.
To loosen the bearing retainer, turn it clockwise.
4. Remove:
final drive pinion gear
(with the special tools)
Crankshaft installer bolt
adapter 1
90890-01277
Armature shock puller 2
90890-01290
Weight 3
90890-01291
WARNING
Always use new bearings.
CAUTION:
The final drive pinion gear should only be removed if ring gear replacement is necessary.
6-81
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
EAS06725
REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE RING
GEAR BEARINGS
1. Remove:
_ collar 1
_ oil seal 2
_ bearing 3
(with an appropriate press tool 4 and an appropriate support for the final drive housing)
2. Check:
_ bearing
Damage Replace.
3. Remove:
_ bearing 1
a. Heat the final gear case to approximately
150 _C (302 _F).
b. Remove the bearing outer races with an appropriately shaped punch 2 .
c. Remove the inner race from the final drive
pinion gear.
NOTE:
The removal of the final drive pinion gear bearing is a difficult procedure and is rarely necessary.
4. Install:
_ bearing (New)
a. Heat the final gear case to approximately
150_C (302_F).
b. Install the bearing outer races with a socket
or appropriate tool that matches the diameter
of the races.
c. Install the inner race onto the final drive pinion gear.
6-82
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
5. Install:
collar 1
oil seal 2 New
bearing
(with an appropriate press tool 3 and press)
NOTE:
The bearing can be reused, but Yamaha recommends installing a new one.
EAS00726
ALIGNING THE FINAL DRIVE PINION GEAR
AND RING GEAR
NOTE:
Aligning the final drive pinion gear and ring gear
is necessary when any of the following parts are
replaced:
Final drive housing
Any bearing
1. Select:
final drive pinion gear shim(-s) 1
ring gear shim(-s) 2
a. Position the final drive pinion gear and the
ring gear with shims 1 and 2 . Calculate the
respective thicknesses from information
marked on the final drive housing and the
drive pinion gear.
1 Final drive pinion gear shim
2 Ring gear shim
3 Thrust washer
b. To find final drive pinion gear shim thickness
“A” use the following formula:
Final drive pinion gear shim thickness
A = (84 + a /100) – b
6-83
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
Where:
a = a numeral (positive or negative) on the ring
gear, to be divided by 100 and added to “84”
b = a numeral on the final drive housing.
Example:
If the final drive pinion gear is marked “+ 01” and
the final drive housing is marked “83.50”:
A = (84 + 1/100) – (83.50)
= (84 + 0.01) – (83.50)
= 84.01 – 83.50
= 0.51
Therefore, the calculated final drive pinion gear
shim thickness is 0.51 mm.
Shim sizes are supplied in the following thicknesses.
Final drive pinion gear shim
Thickness (mm)
0.30, 0.40, 0.50
Since the final drive pinion gear shims are only
available in 0.10 mm increments, round off to
the hundredths digit.
Hundredths
Rounded value
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
0
5, 6, 7, 8, 9
10
In the example above, the calculated final drive
pinion gear shim thickness is 0.51 mm. The
chart instructs you to round off the 1 to 0. Thus,
you should use a 0.50 mm final drive pinion gear
shim.
c. To find ring gear shim thickness “B”, use the
following formula:
Ring gear shim thickness
B = c + d – [(35.40 + e /100) + f ]
Where:
c = a numeral on the final drive housing.
d = a numeral usually on the outside of the ring
gear bearing housing.
e = a numeral (positive or negative) on the inside of the ring gear, to be divided by 100 and
added to “35.40”.
6-84
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
f = the ring gear bearing thickness constant
Ring gear bearing thickness“ f ”
13.00 mm
Example:
If the final drive housing is marked “45.51” the
ring gear bearing housing is marked “3.35” the
ring gear is marked “-05”, and “f” is 13.00:
B = 45.51 + 3.35 – [(35.40 – 5/100) + 13]
= 45.51 + 3.35 – [(35.40 – 0.05) + 13]
= 48.86 – [35.35 + 13]
= 48.86 – 48.35
= 0.51
Therefore, the calculated ring gear shim thickness is 0.51 mm.
Shim sizes are supplied in the following thickness.
Ring gear shim
Thickness (mm)
0.30, 0.40, 0.50
Since the ring gear shims are only available in
0.10 mm increments, round off the hundredths
digit.
Hundredths
Rounded value
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
0
5, 6, 7, 8, 9
10
In the example above, the calculated final gear
shim thickness is 0.51 mm. The chart instructs
you to round off the 1 to 0. Thus, you should use
a 0.50 mm ring gear shim.
2. Install:
shim(s) (as calculated)
final drive pinion gear
bearing retainer
115Nm (11.5 mkg)
(with the bearing retainer wrench)
CAUTION:
The bearing retainer has left-hand threads.
To tighten the bearing retainer, turn it counterclockwise.
6-85
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
Bearing retainer wrench
90890-04077
3. Install:
gear coupling
130 Nm (13.0 mkg)
self-locking nut
(with the special tool 1 )
Coupling gear/middle shaft tool
90890-01229
CAUTION:
Apply LOCTITE to the self-locking nut.
4. Install:
ring gear bearing housing
(along with the ring gear, but without the
thrust washer)
5. Adjust:
ring gear backlash
Refer to “MEASURING THE RING GEAR
BACKLASH” and “ADJUSTING THE RING
GEAR BACKLASH”.
6. Measure:
ring-gear-to-thrust-washer clearance
a. Remove the ring gear bearing housing
(along with the ring gear).
b. Place four pieces of Plastigauge between
the original thrust washer and the ring gear.
c. Install the ring gear bearing housing and
tighten the bolts, and nuts to specification.
Ring gear bearing housing bolt
(M10)
40 Nm (4.0 mkg)
Ring gear bearing housing
nut (M8)
23 Nm (2.3 mkg)
NOTE:
Do not turn the final drive pinion gear and ring
gear while measuring the ring-gear-to-thrustwasher clearance with Plastigauge.
d. Remove the ring gear bearing housing.
e. Measure the width of the flattened Plastigauge 1 .
Ring-gear-to-thrust-washer
clearance
0.2 mm
f. If the ring-gear-to-thrust-washer clearance is
within specification, install the ring gear bearing housing (along with the ring gear).
6-86
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
g. If the ring-gear-to-thrust-washer clearance is
out of specification, select the correct thrust
washer as follows.
h. Select the suitable thrust washer from the following chart.
Thrust washer
Thickness (mm)
1.2, 1.4, 1.6, 1.8, 2.0
i. Repeat the measurement steps until the
ring-gear-to-thrust-washer clearance is within the specified limits.
Ring-gear-to-thrust-washer
clearance
0.2 mm
EAS00727
CHECKING THE DRIVE SHAFT
1. Check:
drive shaft splines
Damage/wear Replace the drive shaft.
EAS00728
INSTALLING THE DRIVE SHAFT
1. Lubricate:
drive shaft splines
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide grease
2. Apply:
sealant
(onto both final drive housing mating surfaces)
Yamaha bond No. 1215
90890-85505
3. Install:
drive shaft
(to the final drive pinion gear)
6-87
SHAFT DRIVE
CHAS
4. Tighten:
final bearing housing nuts
42 Nm (4.3 mkg)
5. Install:
rear wheel assembly
Refer to “REAR WHEEL AND BRAKE
DISC”.
6-88
–
ELEC
+
7
ELEC
CHAPTER 7
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
CHECKING THE SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TYPES OF BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULB SOCKETS . . . . . . . .
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-7
IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STARTER MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-13
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-19
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
LIGHTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26
7-26
7-27
7-28
SIGNAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKING THE SIGNALING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-31
7-31
7-33
7-34
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUEL PUMP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-39
7-39
7-40
7-41
7-43
ELEC
CARBURETOR HEATER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
SELF-DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
EB800000
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Main switch
Thermo switch
Flasher relay
Starting circuit cut off relay
Ignition coil
Starter relay
Fuse
Igniter unit
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Side stand switch
Neutral switch
Rectifier/ regulator
Oil lamp relay
Battery
Rear brake switch
Horn
7-1
ELEC
SWITCHES
ELEC
EAS0010
SWITCHES
CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY
Check each switch for continuity with the pocket
tester. If the continuity reading is incorrect,
check the wiring connections and if necessary,
replace the switch.
CAUTION:
Never insert the tester probes into the coupler terminal slots 1 . Always insert the
probes from the opposite end of the coupler,
taking care not to loosen or damage the
leads.
Pocket tester
90890-03112
NOTE:
Before checking for continuity, set the pocket
tester to “0” and to the “Ω 1” range.
When checking for continuity, switch back and
forth between the switch positions a few times.
B
The terminal connections for switches (e.g.,
main switch, engine stop switch) are shown in
an illustration similar to the one on the left.
The switch positions a are shown in the far left
column and the switch lead colors b are shown
in the top row in the switch illustration.
B
NOTE:
“
” indicates a continuity of electricity
between switch terminals (i.e., a closed circuit
at the respective switch position).
The example illustration on the left shows
that:
There is continuity between blue/red and red
when the switch is set to “ ”.
There is continuity between blue/red and blue,
between brown/blue and red, and between
blue/yellow and black when the switch is set to
“ON”.
7-2
ELEC
CHECKING THE SWITCHES
EAS00731
CHECKING THE SWITCHES
Check each switch for damage or wear, proper connections, and also for continuity between the terminals. Refer to “CHECKING SWITCH CONTINUITY”.
Damage/wear Repair or replace the switch.
Improperly connected Properly connect.
Incorrect continuity reading Replace the switch.
*1
*2
7-3
CECKING THE SWITCHES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Clutch switch
Pass switch
Horn switch
Dimmer switch
Turn switch
Main switch
Front brake switch
Lights switch (for Europe)
9 Engine stop switch
10 Start switch
11 Fuse
12 Rear brake switch
13 Sidestand switch
14 Neutral switch
*1: for Europe
*2: for AUS
7-4
ELEC
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS
ELEC
EAS00732
CHECKING THE
BULB SOCKETS
BULBS
AND
Check each bulb and bulb socket for damage or
wear, proper connections, and also for continuity between the terminals.
Damage/wear Repair or replace the bulb,
bulb socket or both.
Improperly connected Properly connect.
Incorrect continuity reading Repair or replace
the bulb, bulb socket or both.
TYPES OF BULBS
The bulbs used on this motorcycle are shown in
the illustration on the left.
Bulbs A and B are used for headlights and
usually use a bulb holder which must be detached before removing the bulb. The majority
of these bulbs can be removed from their respective socket by turning them counterclockwise.
Bulb C is used for turn signal and tail/brake
lights and can be removed from the socket by
pushing and turning the bulb counterclockwise.
Bulbs D and E are used for meter and indicator lights and can be removed from their respective socket by turn D and pulling E them
out.
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE
BULBS
The following procedure applies to all of the
bulbs.
1. Remove:
bulb
7-5
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS
ELEC
WARNING
Since the headlight bulb gets extremely hot,
keep flammable products and your hands
away from the bulb until it has cooled down.
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold the socket firmly when removing the bulb. Never pull the lead, otherwise it may be pulled out of the terminal in
the coupler.
Avoid touching the glass part of the headlight bulb to keep it free from oil, otherwise
the transparency of the glass, the life of the
bulb and the luminous flux will be adversely affected. If the headlight bulb gets soiled,
thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened
with alcohol or lacquer thinner.
2. Check:
bult (for continuity)
(with the pocket tester)
No continuity Replace.
Pocket tester
90890-03112
NOTE:
Before checking for continuity, set the pocket
tester to “0” and to the “Ω 1” range.
a. Connect the tester positive probe to terminal
1 and the tester negative probe to terminal
2 , and check the continuity.
b. Connect the tester positive probe to terminal
1 and the tester negative probe to terminal
3 , and check the continuity.
c. If either of the readings indicate no continuity,
replace the bulb.
7-6
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS
ELEC
CHECKING THE CONDITION OF THE BULB
SOCKETS
The following procedure applies to all of the bulb
sockets.
1. Check:
bulb socket (for continuity)
(with the pocket tester)
No continuity Replace.
Pocket tester
90890-03112
NOTE:
Check each bulb socket for continuity in the
same manner as described in the bulb section;
however, note the following.
a. Install a good bulb into the bulb socket.
b. Connect the pocket tester probes to the respective leads of the bulb socket.
c. Check the bulb socket for continuity.
If any of the readings indicate no continuity,
replace the bulb socket.
7-7
1
4
5
6
7
8
13
16
17
18
20
29
38
60
Pickup coil
Main switch
Alam system (option)
Ignition fuse
Battery
Main fuse
Starting circuit cut-off relay
Ignitor unit
Ignition coil
Spark plug
Neutral switch
Sidestand switch
Engine stop switch
Diode
IGNITION SYSTEM
7-8
ELEC
EB802000
IGNITION SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
IGNITION SYSTEM
EAS00737
ELEC
EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
_ Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
The ignition system fails to operate (no
spark or intermittent spark).
Check:
1. main and ignition fuses
2. battery
3. spark plugs
4. ignition spark gap
5. spark plug cap resistance
6. ignition coil resistance
7. pickup coil resistance
8. main switch
9. engine stop switch
10. neutral switch
11. sidestand switch
12. diode
13. starting circuit cut-off relay (diode)
14. wiring
(of the entire ignition system)
Min. open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20 _C
_ Is the battery OK?
YES
NO
_ Clean the battery
terminals.
_ Recharge or replace the battery.
EAS00741
3. Spark plugs
NOTE:
_ Before troubleshooting, remove the following
part(-s):
1) battery cover
2) rider’s seat
3) fuel tank
4) steering head side covers
5) tool box cover
6) left side cover
7) cylinder head covers
_ Troubleshoot with the following special
tool(-s).
The following procedure applies to all of the
spark plugs.
_ Check the condition of the spark plug.
_ Check the spark plug type.
_ Measure the spark plug gap.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SPARK PLUGS”
in chapter 3.
Standard spark plug
BPR7ES
W22EPR-U
Spark plug gap
0.7 X 0.8 mm
Ignition checker
90890-06754
Pocket tester
90890-03112
_ Is the spark plug in good condition, is it of the
correct type, and its gap within specification?
1. Main and ignition fuses
Re-gap or replace
the spark plug.
YES
NO
EAS00738
_ Check the main and ignition fuses for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in chapter 3.
_ Are the main and ignition fuses OK?
YES
NO
Replace the fuse(-s).
7-9
ELEC
IGNITION SYSTEM
EAS00743
Spark plug cap resistance
10 kΩ at 20 _C
4. Ignition spark gap
The following procedure applies to all of the
spark plugs.
_ Disconnect the spark plug cap from the
spark plug.
_ Connect the ignition checker 1 as shown.
_ 2 Spark plug cap
_ Set the main switch to “ON”.
_ Measure the ignition spark gap a .
_ Crank the engine by pushing the start switch
and gradually increase the spark gap until a
misfire occurs.
_ Is the spark plug cap OK?
YES
NO
Replace the spark
plug cap.
EAS00747
6. Ignition coil resistance
The following procedure applies to all of the
ignition coils.
_ Disconnect the ignition coil connectors from
the ignition coil terminals.
_ Connect the pocket tester (Ω
1) to the
ignition coil as shwon.
Tester positive probe red/black
Tester negative probe orange (gray)
Min. ignition spark gap
6 mm
_ Is there a spark and is the spark gap within
specification ?
NO
YES
The ignition system
is OK.
_ Measure the primary coil resistance.
EAS00745
Primary coil resistance
3.57 X 4.83 Ω at 20_C
5. Spark plug cap resistance.
The following procedure applies to all of the
spark plug caps.
_ Disconnect the spark plug cap from the
spark plug.
_ Connect the pocket tester (Ω
1k) to the
spark plug cap as shown.
_ Measure the spark plug cap resistance.
_ Connect the pocket tester (Ω
1k) to the
ignition coil as shown.
_ Measure the secondary coil resistance.
Tester positive probe spark plug lead 1
Tester negative probe Orange (gray) lead 2
7-10
IGNITION SYSTEM
ELEC
EAS00749
8. Main switch
_ Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the main switch OK?
YES
Replace the main
switch.
Secondary coil resistance
10.7 X 14.5 kΩ 20 _C
EAS00750
_ Is the ignition coil OK?
YES
NO
9. Engine stop switch
_ Check the engine stop switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the engine stop switch OK?
NO
Replace the ignition
coil.
YES
NO
EAS00748
Replace the right
handlebar switch.
7. Pickup coil resistance
_ Disconnect the pickup coil coupler from the
wire harness.
_ Connect the pocket tester (Ω
100) to the
pickup coil terminal.
EAS00751
10. Neutral switch
_ Check the neutral switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the neutral switch OK?
Tester positive probe gray 1
Tester negative probe black/blue 2
YES
NO
Replace the neutral
switch.
EAS00752
11. Sidestand switch
_ Check the sidestand switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the sidestand switch OK?
_ Measure the pickup coil resistance.
Pickup coil resistance
189 X 231 Ω at 20 _C
(between gray and black/blue)
YES
_ Is the pickup coil OK?
YES
NO
Replace the sidestand switch.
NO
Replace the pickup
coil.
7-11
IGNITION SYSTEM
:
ELEC
13. Starting circuit cut-off relay (diode)
S Remove the relay unit from the wire harness.
S Check for continuity as follows:
Sky blue – Blue/Yellow 2
12. Diode
S Remove the diode from the wire harness.
S Check for continuity as follows:
Tester (+) lead Blue/White 1
Tester (–) lead Blue/Yellow 2
Continuity
Tester (+) lead Blue/Yellow 2
Tester (–) lead Blue/White 1
No Continuity
Tester (+) lead SKy blue 1
Tester (–) lead Blue/Yellow 2
Continuity
Tester (+) lead Blue/Yellow 2
Tester (–) lead Sky blue 1
No Continuity
NOTE:
When you switch the “–” and “+” leads of the
digital pocket tester the readings in the above
chart will be reversed.
NOTE:
When you switch the “–” and “+” leads of the
digital pocket tester the readings in the above
chart will be reversed.
S Is the starting circuit cut-off relay (diode)
OK?
YES
S Is the diode OK?
YES
NO
NO
Replace the starting
circuit cut-off relay.
Replace the diode.
EAS00754
14. Wiring
S Check the entire ignition system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
S Is the ignition system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
NO
Properly connect or
repair the ignition
system’s wiring.
7-12
YES
Replace the ignitor
unit.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
20
29
36
37
38
60
Main switch
Alarm system (option)
Ignition fuse
Battery
Main fuse
Starter relay
Starter motor
Starting circuit cut off relay
Neutral switch
Sidestand switch
Clutch switch
Start switch
Engine stop switch
Diode
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
7-13
ELEC
EB803000
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC
EB803010
STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATION
The starting circuit on this model consists of the
starter motor, starter relay, and the starting circuit cut-off relay. If the engine stop switch is on
“RUN” and the main switch is on “ON” (both
switches are closed), the starter motor can operate only if:
The transmission is in neutral (the neutral
switch is closed).
or if
The clutch lever is pulled to the handlebar
(the clutch switch is closed) and the sidestand is up (the sidestand switch is closed).
The starting circuit cut-off relay prevents the
starter from operating when neither of these
conditions have been met. In this instance, the
starting circuit cut-off relay is open so current
cannot reach the starter motor.
When at least one of the above conditions have
been met however, the starting circuit cut-off
relay is closed, and the engine can be started by
pressing the starter switch.
WHEN THE TRANSMISSION IS IN
NEUTRAL
WHEN THE SIDESTAND IS UP AND
THE CLUTCH LEVER IS PULLED IN
1 Battery
2 Main fuse
3 Main switch
4 Ignition fuse
5 Engine stop switch
6 Starting circuit cut-off relay
7 Diode
8 Clutch switch
9 Sidestand switch
10 Neutral switch
11 Start switch
12 Starter relay
13 Starter motor
7-14
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS00757
ELEC
EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
_ Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
The starter motor fails to turn.
Check:
1. main and ignition fuses
2. battery
3. starter motor
4. starting circuit cutoff relay
5. starting circuit cutoff relay (diode)
6. starter relay
7. main switch
8. engine stop switch
9. neutral switch
10. sidestand switch
11. clutch switch
12. start switch
13. diode
14. wiring
(of the entire starting system)
Open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20 _C
_ Is the battery OK?
YES
NO
_ Clean the battery
terminals.
_ Recharge or replace the battery.
EAS00758
3. Starter motor
NOTE:
_ Before troubleshooting, remove the following
part(-s):
1) battery cover
2) rider’s seat
3) fuel tank
4) steering head side covers
5) left side cover
_ Troubleshoot with the following special
tool(-s).
_ Connect the battery positive terminal 1
and starter motor lead 2 with a jumper lead
3.
Pocket tester
90890-03112
WARNING
EAS00738
_ A wire that is used as a jumper lead
must have at least the same capacity of
the battery lead, otherwise the jumper
lead may burn.
_ This check is likely to produce sparks,
therefore make sure that no flammable
gas or fluid is in the vicinity.
1. Main and ignition fuses
_ Check the main and ignition fuses for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in chapter 3.
_ Are the main and ignition fuses OK?
YES
NO
_ Does the starter motor turn?
YES
Replace the fuse(-s).
NO
Repair or replace the
starter motor.
7-15
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS00759
ELEC
EAS00760
4. Starting circuit cutoff relay
5. Starting circuit cutoff relay (Diode)
Disconnect the relay unit from the coupler.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) and battery (12V) to the relay unit terminals as
shown.
Disconnect the starting circuit cutoff relay
from the coupler.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the
starting circuit cutoff relay terminals as
shown.
Measure the starting circuit cutoff relay for
continuity as follows.
Battery positive terminal red/black 1
Battery negative terminal black/yellow 2
Tester positive probe blue 3
Tester negative probe black 4
Tester positive probe sky blue 1
Tester negative probe black/yellow 2
Continuity
Tester positive probe black/yellow 2
Tester negative probe sky blue 1
No
continuity
Does the starting circuit cutoff relay have
continuity between black and blue/white?
YES
NO
NOTE:
When you switch the “–” and “+” leads of the
digital pocket tester the readings in the above
chart will be reversed.
Replace the relay
unit.
Are the tester readings correct?
YES
NO
Replace the relay
unit.
7-16
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS00761
ELEC
EAS00750
6. Starter relay
8. Engine stop switch
Disconnect the starter relay from the coupler.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) and battery (12 V) to the starter relay coupler as
shown.
Check the engine stop switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the engine stop switch OK?
YES
Battery positive terminal red/white 1
Battery negative terminal blue 2
NO
Replace the right
handlebar switch.
Tester positive probe red 3
Tester negative probe black 4
EAS00751
9. Neutral switch
Check the neutral switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the neutral switch OK?
YES
Replace the neutral
switch.
Does the starter relay have continuity between red and black?
YES
NO
NO
EAS00752
10. Sidestand switch
Check the sidestand switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the sidestand switch OK?
Replace the starter
relay.
YES
EAS00749
NO
7. Main switch
Replace the
stand switch.
Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the main switch OK?
YES
side-
EAS00763
NO
11. Clutch switch
Check the clutch switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the clutch switch OK?
Replace the main
switch.
YES
NO
Replace the clutch
switch.
7-17
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS00764
12. Start switch
Check the start switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the start switch OK?
YES
NO
Replace the right
handlebar switch.
13. Diode
Check the diode for continuity.
Refer to “IGNITION SYSTEM”.
Is the diode OK?
YES
NO
Replace the diode.
EAS00766
14. Wiring
Check the entire starting system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Is the starting system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
NO
Properly connect or
repair the starting
system’s wiring.
YES
The starting system
circuit is OK.
7-18
ELEC
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC
STARTER MOTOR
10 Nm (1.0 mkg)
Order
1
2
Job name/Part name
Q’ty
Remarks
Remove the parts in the order listed.
Removing the starter motor
Starter motor lead
Starter motor assembly
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Disassembling the starter motor
Circlip
Starter motor drive gear
Starter motor rear cover
Washer set
Starter motor front cover
Washer set
End bracket
Planetary gears
Armature assembly
Brush holder/brush
Starter motor yoke
Disassembly the pats in the order listed.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1/1
1
Refer to “Assembling the starter motor.”
Refer to “Assembling the starter motor.”
Refer to “Assembling the starter motor.”
Refer to “Assembling the starter motor.”
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure
7-19
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC
EAS00769
Checking the starter motor
1. Check:
_ commutator
Dirt Clean with 600 grit sandpaper.
2. Measure:
_ commutator diameter a
Out of specification Replace the starter
motor.
Min. commutator diameter
27 mm
3. Measure:
_ mica undercut a
Out of specification Scrape the mica to the
proper measurement with a hacksaw blade
which has been grounded to fit the commutator.
Mica undercut
0.7 mm
NOTE:
The mica must be undercut to ensure proper operation of the commutator.
4. Measure:
_ armature assembly resistances (commutator and insulation)
Out of specification Replace the starter
motor.
a. Measure the armature assembly resistances with the pocket tester.
Pocket tester
90890-03112
Armature assembly
Armature coil resistance 1
0.026 X 0.034 Ω at 20 _C
Insulation resistance 2
Above 1 MΩ at 20 _C
b. If any resistance is out of specification, replace the starter motor.
7-20
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC
5. Measure:
brush length a
Out of specification Replace the brushes
as a set.
Min. brush length
5 mm
6. Measure:
brush spring force
Out of specification Replace the brush
springs as a set.
Bruch spring force
7.65 X 10.01 N (780 X 1.020 g)
7. Check:
gear teeth
Damage/wear Replace the gear.
8. Check:
oil seal
Damage/wear Replace the defective
part(-s).
EAS00772
Assembling the starter motor
1. Install:
brush holder 1
NOTE:
Align the tab a on the brush holder with the slot
in the starter motor rear cover.
2. Install:
starter motor yoke 1
end bracket 2
starter motor front cover 3
NOTE:
Align the projection a on the front cover with the
slot b on the end cover and starter motor yoke.
7-21
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
ELEC
3. Install:
Starter motor rear cover 1
NOTE:
Align the match marks a on the rear cover with
the match marks b on the front cover.
7-22
CHARGING SYSTEM
ELEC
EB804000
CHARGING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2
3
7
8
7-23
AC magneto (stator coil)
Rectifier/ regulator
Battery
Main fuse
CHARGING SYSTEM
EAS00774
ELEC
EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
_ Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
BATTERY” in chapter 3.
The battery is not being sharged.
Check:
1. main fuses
2. battery
3. charging voltage
4. startor coil assembly resistance
5. wiring
(of the entire charging system)
Open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20_C
_ Is the battery OK
YES
NOTE:
_ Before troubleshooting, remove the following
part(-s):
1) battery cover
2) rider’s seat
3) left side cover
_ Troubleshoot with the following special
tool(-s).
NO
_ Clean the battery
terminals.
_ Recharge or replace the battery.
EAS00775
3. Charging voltage
Engine tachometer
90890-03113
Pocket tester
90890-03112
_ Connect the engine tachometer to the spark
plug lead of cylinder #1.
_ Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
battery as shown.
Tester positive probe battery positive terminal
Tester negative probe battery negative terminal
EAS00738
1. Main fuse
_ Check the main fuse for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in chapter 3.
_ Is the main fuse OK?
YES
_ Start the engine and let it run at approximately 5,000 r/min.
_ Measure the charging voltage.
NO
Replace the fuse.
Charging voltage
14 V at 5,000 r/min
7-24
CHARGING SYSTEM
ELEC
EAS00779
5. Wiring
NOTE:
Make sure that the battery is fully charged.
_ Check the wiring connections of the entire
charging system.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
_ Is the charging system’s wiring properly conected and without defects?
_ Is the charging voltage within specification?
NO
YES
NO
The charging circuit
is OK.
Properly connect or
repair the charging
system’s wiring.
EAS00776
4. Stator coil assembly resistances
_ Remove the generator cover.
_ Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the stator coil assembly coupler as shown.
Tester positive probe White 1
Tester negative probe white 2
Tester positive probe white 1
Tester negative probe white 3
_ Measure the stator coil assembly resistances.
Stator coil resistance
0.36 X 0.44 Ω at 20_C
_ Is the stator coil assembly OK?
YES
NO
Replace the stator
coil assembly.
7-25
YES
Replace the rectifier/regulator.
7-26
Main switch
Battery
Main fuse
Meter light
High beam indicator
Light switch
Dimmer switch
Pass switch
52 Headlight fuse
49 Auxiliary light
50 Tail/brake light
48 Headlight
46
44
39
27
25
8
7
4
LIGHTING SYSTEM
ELEC
EB805000
LIGHTING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
LIGHTING SYSTEM
EAS00781
ELEC
EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
_ Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
Any of the following fail to light: headlight,
high beam indicator light, taillight, auxiliary light (for Europe) or meter light.
Open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20_C
Check:
1. main and headlight fuses
2. battery
3. main switch
4. lights switch (for Europe)
5. dimmer switch
6. pass switch
7. wiring
(of the entire charging system)
_ Is the battery OK?
YES
NO
_ Clean the battery
terminals.
_ Recharge or replace the battery.
NOTE:
_ Before troubleshooting, remove the following
part(-s).
1) battery cover
2) rider’s seat
3) fuel tank
4) steering head side covers
5) headlight lens unit
6) tool box cover
_ Troubleshoot with the following special
tool(-s).
EAS00749
3. Main switch
_ Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the main switch OK?
YES
NO
Replace the main
switch.
Pocket tester
90890-03112
EAS00738
1. Main, and headlight fuses
EAS00783
4. Lights switch (for Europe)
_ Check the main, and headlight fuses for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in chapter 3.
_ Are the main, and headlight fuses OK?
YES
_ Check the lights switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the lights switch OK?
YES
NO
NO
The lights switch is
faulty. Replace the
right
handlebar
switch.
Replace the fuse(-s).
7-27
LIGHTING SYSTEM
EAS00784
ELEC
EAS00788
CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM
1. The headlight and the high beam indicator
light fail to came on.
5. Dimmer switch
Check the dimmer switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the dimmer switch OK?
YES
1. Headlight bulb and socket
Check the headlight bulb and socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
Are the headlight bulb and socket OK?
NO
The dimmer switch is
faulty. Replace the
left handlebar switch.
YES
NO
Replace the headlight bulb, socket or
both.
EAS00786
6. Pass switch
Check the pass switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the pass switch OK?
2. Voltage
YES
NO
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
headlight and high beam indicator light couplers as shown.
The pass switch is
faulty. Replace the
left hadlebar switch.
A When the dimmer switch is set to “
B When the dimmer switch is set to “
Headlight
Tester positive probe yellow 1 or green 2
Tester negative probe black 3
High beam indicator light
Tester positive probe yellow 4
Tester negative probe brack 5
EAS00787
7. Wiring
Check the entire lighting system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Is the lighting system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
Headlight coupler (wire harness side)
YES
Check the condition
of each of the lighting
system’s circuits.
Refer to “CHECKING
THE LIGHTING SYSTEM”.
”
”
NO
Properly connect or
repair the lighting system’s wiring.
G
Y
7-28
LIGHTING SYSTEM
B
ELEC
2. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (20 V) to the meter
assembly coupler (wire harness side) as
shown.
Tester positive probe blue 1
Tester negative probe black 2
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Set the light switch to “
”.
Set the dimmer switch to “
” or “
”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of yellow 1 or
green 2 on the headlight coupler (headlight
side).
Measure the voltage (12V) of yellow 4 on the
meter assembly coupler.
Is the voltage within specification?
NO
YES
This circuit is OK.
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Set the light switch to “
” or “
”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of blue 1 on the
meter assembly coupler (wire harness side).
Is the voltage within specification?
The wiring circuit
from the main switch
to the headlight coupler is faulty and must
be repaired.
YES
This circuit is OK.
EAS00789
2. A meter light fails to come on.
NO
The wiring circuit
from the main switch
to the meter assembly coupler is faulty
and must be repaired.
1. Meter light bulb and socket.
Check the meter light bulb and socket for
continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
Are the meter light bulb and socket OK?
YES
EAS00790
3. A tail/brake light fails to come on.
1. Tail/brake light bulb and socket
Check the tail/brake light bulb and socket for
continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
Are the tail/brake light bulb and socket OK?
NO
Replace the meter
light bulb, socket or
both.
YES
NO
Replace the tail/
brake lightbulb, socket or both.
7-29
LIGHTING SYSTEM
ELEC
2. Voltage
2. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
tail/brake light coupler (wire harness side) as
shown.
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
auxiliary light couplers (wire harness side) as
shown.
Tester positive probe blue 1
Tester negative probe black 2
Tester positive probe blue/red 1
Tester negative probe black 2
Set the main switch to “ON”
Set the light switch to “
” or “
”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of blue/red 1 on
the tail/brake light coupler (wire harness
side).
Is the voltage within specification?
Set the main switch to “ON”
Set the light switch to “
” or “
”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of blue/red 1 on
the auxiliary light couplers (wire harness
side).
Is the voltage within specification?
YES
This circuit is OK.
NO
YES
The wiring circuit
from the main switch
to the tail/brake light
coupler is faulty and
must be repaired.
This circuit is OK.
EB05413
4. The auxiliary light fails to come on. (for Europe)
1. Auxiliary light bulb and socket
Check the auxiliary light bulb and socket for
continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
Are the auxiliary light bulb and socket OK?
YES
NO
Replace the auxiliary
light bulb, socket or
both.
7-30
NO
The wiring circuit
from the main switch
to the auxiliary light
connectors is faulty
and must be repaired.
SIGNAL SYSTEM
EB806000
SIGNAL SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
7-31
ELEC
SIGNAL SYSTEM
4 Main switch
6 Ignition fuse
7 Battery
8 Main fuse
11 Oil level gauge
12 Oil lamp relay
20 Neutral switch
22 Oil warning light
24 Turn signal indicator light
26 Neutral indicator light
30 Flasher relay
31 Turn signal switch
32 Rear turn signal light (R)
33 Rear turn signal light (L)
34 Front turn signal light (R)
35 Front turn signal light (L)
40 Front brake switch
42 Horn
43 Horn switch
45 Rear brake switch
50 Tail/ brake light
53 Signal fuse
7-32
ELEC
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EB806010
ELEC
EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
_ Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BATTERY” in
chapter 3.
_ Any of the following fail to light: turn signal light, brake light or an indicator light.
_ The forn fails to sound.
Open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20_C
Check:
1. main and signaling system fuses
2. battery
3. main switch
4. wiring
(of the entrire signaling system)
_ Is the battery OK?
YES
NO
_ Clean the battery
terminals.
_ Recharge or replace the battery.
NOTE:
_ Before troubleshooting, remove the following
part(-s):
1) battery cover
2) rider’s seat
3) fuel tank
4) steering head side covers
5) headlight lens unit
6) tool box cover
7) left side cover
_ Troubleshoot with the following special
tool(-s).
EAS00749
3. Main switch
_ Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the main switch OK?
YES
Pocket tester
90890-03112
NO
Replace
switch.
the
main
EAS00738
1. Main, ignition and signaling system fuses
EAS00795
_ Check the main ignition and signaling system fuses for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE FUSES” in chapter 3.
_ Are the main ignition and signaling system
fuses OK?
YES
4. Wiring
_ Check the entire signaling system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
_ Is the signaling system’s wiring properly connected and without defects?
YES
NO
Check the condition
of each of the signaling system’s circuits.
Refer to “CHECKING
THE
SIGNALING
SYSTEM”.
Replace the fuse(-s).
7-33
NO
Properly connect or
repair the signaling
system’s wring.
SIGNALING SYSTEM
ELEC
EAS00796
3. Horn
CHECKING THE SIGNALING SYSTEM
1. The horn fails to sound.
Disconnect the black connector at the horn
terminal.
Connect a jumper lead 1 to the horn terminal
and ground the jumper lead.
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Does the horn sound?
1. Horn switch
Check the forn switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the horn switch OK?
YES
NO
Br
Replace the left handlebar switch.
2. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
horn connecter at the horn terminal as
shown.
NO
Tester positive probe brown 1
Tester negative probe ground
Br
YES
The horn is OK.
P
4. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
horn connecter at the black terminal as
shown.
Tester positive probe black 1
Tester negative probe ground
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of brown at the
horn terminal.
Is the voltage within specification?
YES
Br
P
NO
The wiring circuit
from the main switch
to the horn connecter
is faulty and must be
repaired.
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of black 1 at the
horn terminal.
Is the voltage within specification?
YES
Repair or replace the
horn.
7-34
NO
Replace the horn.
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EAS00797
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Pull in the brake lever or push down on the
brake pedal.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of yellow at the
tail/brake light coupler (wire harness side).
Is the voltage within specification?
2. A tail/brake light fails to come on.
1. Tail/brake light bulb and socket
Check the tail/brake light bulb and socket for
continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
Are the tail/brake light bulb and socket OK?
YES
ELEC
YES
This circuit is OK.
NO
Replace the tail/
brake lightbulb, socket or both.
NO
The wiring circuit
from the main switch
to the tail/brake light
coupler is faulty and
must bne repaired.
2. Brake light switches
Check the brake light switches for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the brake light switch OK?
YES
EAS00799
3. A turn signal light, turn signal indicator light
or both fail to blink.
NO
1. Turn signal light bulb and socket
Check the turn signal light bulb and socket for
continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
Are the turn signal light bulb and socket OK?
Replace the brake
light switch.
3. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
tail/brake light coupler (wire harness side) as
shown.
YES
NO
Replace the turn signal light bulb, socket
or both.
Tester positive probe yellow 1
Tester negative probe black 2
7-35
SIGNALING SYSTEM
Tester positive probe brown/white 1
Tester negative probe ground
2. Turn signal switch
Check the turn signal for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the turn signal switch OK?
YES
ELEC
NO
Replace the left handlebar switch.
3. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
flasher relay coupler (wire harness side) as
shown.
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Set the turn signal switch to “
” or “
”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) or brown/white at
the flasher relay coupler (wire harness side).
Is the voltage within specification?
Tester positive prove brown 1
Tester negative prove ground
YES
NO
The flasher relay is
faulty and must be replaced.
5. Voltage
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the turn
signal light connectors or the meter assembly
coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of brown 1 at the
flasher relay coupler (wire harness side).
Is the voltage within specification?
YES
A Turn signal light
B Turn signal indicator light
Left turn signal light
Tester positive probe chocolate 1
Tester negative probe ground
Right turn signal light
Tester positive probe daek green 2
Tester negative probe ground
A
B
NO
The wiring circuit
from the main switch
to the flasher relay
coupler (flasher relay
side) is faulty and
must be repaired.
4. Voltage
Connect the tester (DC 20 V) to the flasher
relay coupler (wire harness side) as shown.
R/W
7-36
R/W
ELEC
SIGNALING SYSTEM
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Set the turn signal switch to “
” or “
”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of chocolate 1 or
dark green 2 at the turn signal light connector (wire harness side).
Is the voltage within specification?
YES
This circuit is OK.
3. Voltage
Connect the pockt tester (DC 20V) to the meter assembly coupler (wire harness side) as
shwon.
Tester positive probe brown 1
Tester negative probe sky blue 2
NO
The wiring circuit
from the turn signal
switch to the turn signal light connector is
faulty and must repaired.
L/R
EAS00800
4. The neutral indicator light fails to come on.
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of brown 1 and
sky blue 2 at the meter assembly coupler.
Is the voltage with specification?
1. Neutral indicator light bulb and socket
Check the neutral indicator light bulb and
socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”.
Are the neutral indicator light bulb and socket
OK?
YES
YES
This circuit is OK.
NO
Replace the neutral
indicator light bulb,
socket or both.
NO
The wiring circuit
from the main switch
to the meter light
bulb coupler is faulty
and must be repaired.
EAS00802
5. The oil level warning light fails to come on.
2. Neutral switch
1. Oil level warning light bulb and socket
Check the neutral switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the neutral switch OK?
Check the oil level warning light bulb and
socket for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS AND
BULB SOCKETS”
Are the oil level warning light bulb and socket
OK?
YES
NO
Replace the neutral
switch.
YES
NO
Replace the oil level
warning light bulb,
socket or both.
7-37
SINGNAL SYSTEM
ELEC
2. Oil level switch
4. Voltage
Drain the engine oil and remove the oil level
switch from the oil pan.
Check the oil level switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
Is the oil level switch OK?
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
meter assembly coupler (wire harness side)
as shown.
YES
Tester positive probe red/white 1
Tester negative probe black/white 2
NO
Replace the oil level
switch.
3. Oil lamp relay
Disconnect the oil lamp relay from the coupler.
Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) and battery (12 V) to the oil lamp relay terminals as
shown.
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Measure the voltage (12 V) of brown 1 and
black/red at the meter assembly coupler.
Is the voltage within specification?
Battery positive terminal red/white 1
Battery negative terminal black/red 2
YES
Tester positive probe black/white 3
Tester negative probe black 4
This circuit is OK.
Does the oil lamp relay have continuity between red/blue and black?
YES
NO
Replace the oil lamp
relay.
7-38
NO
The wiring circuit
from the main switch
to the meter assembly coupler is faulty
and must be repaired.
7-39
Main switch
Ignition fuse
Battery
Main fuse
Starting circuit cutoff relay
Fuel pump
Ignitor unit
Engine stop switch
7
38
16
14
13
8
6
4
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM
ELEC
EB808000
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM
EB808010
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT OPERATION
The fuel pump circuit consists of the fuel pump
relay, fuel pump, engine stop switch and ignitor
unit.
The ignitor unit includes the control unit for the
fuel pump.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7-40
Battery
Main fuse
Main switch
Ignition fuse
Engine stop switch
Ignitor unit
Fuel pump relay
Fuel pump
ELEC
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM
EAS00781
ELEC
EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
_ Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
The fuel pump fails to operate.
Check:
1. main, and ignition fuses
2. battery
3. main switch
4. engine stop switch
5. starting circuit cutoff relay (fuel pump relay)
6. fuel pump
7. wiring
(of the entire charging system)
Open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20_C
_ Is the battery OK?
YES
NO
_ Clean the battery
terminals.
_ Recharge or replave the battery.
NOTE:
_ Before troubleshooting, remove the following
part (-s):
1) battery cover
2) rider’s seat
3) fuel tank
4) tool box cover
5) left side cover
_ Troubleshoot with the following special tool
(-s).
EAS00749
3. Main switch
_ Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the main switch OK?
YES
Pocket tester
90890-03112
NO
Replace the main
switch.
EAS00738
1. Main, and ignition fuses
_ Check the main, and ignition fuses for continuity.
Reger to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in
chapter 3.
_ Are the main, and ignition fuses OK?
YES
EAS00750
4. Engine stop switch
_ Check the engine stop switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the engine stop switch OK?
NO
YES
NO
Replace the fuse(-s).
Replace the right
handlebar switch.
7-41
ELEC
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM
EB803023
EB808021
5. Starting circuit cutoff relay (fuel pump relay)
6. Fuel pump resistance
_ Remove the relay unit from the wire harness.
_ Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) and battery (12 V) to the relay unit terminals.
_ Disconnect the fuel pump coupler from the
wire harness.
_ Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) to the fuel
pump coupler terminals.
Battery (+) terminal Red/Black terminal 1
Battery (–) terminal Blue/Red terminal 2
Tester (+) lead Blue/Black terminal 1
Tester (–) lead Black terminal 2
Tester (+) lead Red/Black terminal 1
Tester (–) lead Blue/Black terminal 3
_ Measure the fuel pump resistance.
Fuel pump resistance:
1.6 X 2.2 Ω at 20_C (68_F)
_ Is the fuel pump OK?
YES
_ Does the fuel pump relay have continuity
batween red/black and blue/black?
YES
NO
Replace the fuel
pump.
NO
Replace the starting
circuit cutoff relay.
7. Wiring
_ Check the entire fuel pump system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
_ Is the fuel pump system’s wiring properly
connected and without defects?
NO
Properly connect or
repair the fuel pump
system’s wiring.
7-42
YES
Replace the ignitor
unit.
FUEL PUMP SYSTEM
ELEC
EB808030
FUEL PUMP TEST
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and under
certain circumstances there can be a danger
of an explosion or combustion. Be extremely careful and note the following points:
Stop the engine before refuelling.
Do not smoke and keep away from open
flames, sparks, or any other source of fire.
Take care not to spill gasoline. If you do accidentally spill some, wipe it up immediately with dry rags.
If gasoline touches the engine when the engine is still hot, there is a danger of combustion. Make sure that the engine is completely cool before performing the
following test.
1. Check:
Fuel pump operation
a. Fill up the fuel tank.
b. Put the end of the fuel hose into an open container.
c. Connect the battery (12 V) to the fuel pump
coupler terminals.
Battery (+) lead Blue/black terminal 1
Battery (–) lead Black terminal 2
d. If fuel flows out from the fuel hose, the fuel
pump is good. If not, replace the fuel pump
assembly.
7-43
Main switch
Battery
Main fuse
8
57 Carburetor heater 1
58 Carburetor heater 2
59 Carburetor heater earth
56 Carburetor heater relay
55 Thermo switch
54 Carburetor heater fuse
20 Neutral switch
7
4
CARBURETOR HEATER SYSTEM
CARBURETOR HEATER SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
7-44
ELEC
CARBURETOR HEATER SYSTEM
EAS00781
ELEC
EAS00739
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Battery
_ Check the condition of the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING
THE BATTERY” in chapter 3.
The carburetor heater fails to operate.
Check:
1. main, and carburetor heater
2. battery
3. main switch
4. neatral switch
5. carburetor heater relay
6. thermo
7. carburetor heater
8. wiring
(of the entire charging system)
Open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20_C
_ Is the battery OK?
YES
NO
_ Clean the battery
terminals.
_ Recharge or replace the battery.
NOTE:
_ Before troubleshooting, remove the following
part (-s):
1) battery cover
2) rider’s seat
3) fuel tank
4) steering head side covers
5) tool box cover
_ Troubleshoot with the following special tool
(-s).
EAS00749
3. Main switch
_ Check the main switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the main switch OK?
YES
Pocket tester
90890-03112
NO
Replace the main
switch.
EAS00738
1. Main, and carburetor heater fuses
_ Check the main, and carburetor heater
fuses for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSES” in chapter 3.
_ Are the main, and carburetor heater fuses
OK?
YES
EAS00751
4. Neutral switch
_ Check the neutral switch for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCHES”.
_ Is the neutral switch OK?
NO
YES
Replace the fuse(-s).
NO
Replace the neutral
switch.
7-45
CARBURETOR HEATER SYSTEM
ELEC
5. Carburetor heater relay
_ Remove the carburetor heater relay from the
wire harness.
_ Connect the pocket tester (Ω 1) and battery (12 V) to the carburetor heater relay terminals.
Battery (+) terminal Brown/Yellow terminal 1
Battery (–) terminal Sky blue terminal 2
Tester (+) lead Brown/Black terminal 3
Tester (–) lead Black/Yellow terminal 4
_ Immerse the thermo switch in the water 3 .
_ Check the thermo switch for continuity.
Note the temperatures while heating the water with the temperature gauge 4 .
_ Does the carburetor heater relay have continuity between brown/black and black/yellow?
YES
NO
Test step
Water temperature
Good
condition
1
Less than 23 ± 3_C
f
2
More than 23 ± 3_C
3
More than 12 ± 4_C
4
Less than 12 ± 4_C
f
Test 1 & 2 : Heat-up test
Test 3 & 4 : Cool-down test
f : Continuity
: No continuity
Replace the carburetor heater relay.
OFF
6. Thermo switch
_ Remove the thermo switch from the thermo
switch plate.
_ Connect the pocket tester to the thermo
switch lead.
ON
Thermoswitch
12 ± 4_C
Tester (+) lead Brown/Yellow terminal 1
Tester (–) lead Black/Yellow terminal 2
Thermoswitch
23 ± 3_C
_ Is the thermo switch OK?
YES
NO
Replace the thermo
switch.
7-46
CARBURETOR HEATER SYSTEM
7. Carburetor heater
_ Remove the carburetor heater from the carburetor body.
_ Connect the pocket tester to the carburetor
heater.
Tester (+) lead Heater terminal 1
Tester (–) lead Heater body 2
_ Measure the heater resistance.
Carburetor heater resistance:
12 V 30 W : 6 X 10 Ω at 20_C
_ Is the carburetor heater OK?
YES
NO
Replace the carburetor heater.
EAS00766
8. Wiring
_ Check the entire carburetor heater system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
_ Is the carburetor heater system’s wiring
properly connected and without defects?
NO
Properly connect or
repair the carburetor
heater system’s wiring.
YES
The carburetor heater system circuit is
OK.
7-47
ELEC
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
ELEC
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
The XVS1100 features self-diagnosis.
When the main switch is turned to “ON”, the following items are monitored and the condition codes are
displayed on the engine indicator light (irrespective of whether the engine is running or not).
NOTE:
The XVS1100 features a self-diagnosing system.
In the XVS1100, when the main switch is turned on the “Engine indicator light” in the speedometer
comes on for 1.4 seconds then goes off. However, if there is a malfunction, it comes on for 1.4 seconds,
goes off and then begins flashing. (However, it is on while the engine is running.)
Display condition
code
Item
Condition
Response
When
engine is
stationary
When
engine is
running
Throttle
position Disconnected
sensor (TPS)
Short-circuit
Locked
Enables the motorcycle to
run so that the ignition timing
is fixed when the throttle is
fully opened.
Displays the condition code
on the engine indicator light.
Blinks in
Light on
Fault code: 3
Speed sensor
Displays the condition code
on the enigne indicator light.
Blinks in
Light on
Fault code: 4
Disconnected
short-circuit
Display order on the engine indicator light
1
2
3
4
Light on (seconds) . . . . .
Light off (seconds) . . . . .
Number of blinks . . . . . .
Light off (seconds) . . . . .
0.5 seconds
0.5 seconds
Fault code
3 seconds
Light on
Light off
1
Repetition
2
3
4
7-48
ELEC
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
EAS00835
1. Wire harness
TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the wire harness for continuity.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Is the wire harness OK?
The engine warning light starts to display
the self-diagnosis sequence.
Check:
1. throttle position sensor
2. speed sensor
YES
NO
Repair or replace the
wire harness.
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, remove the following
part(-s):
1) rider seat
2) fuel tank
3) air filter case
4) left side cover
Troubleshoot with the following special
tool(-s).
EB812401
2. Throttle position sensor
Check the throttle position sensor for continuity.
Refer to “CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR” in
chapter 6.
Is the throttle position sensor OK?
Pocket tester
90890-03112
YES
NO
EAS00836
1. Throttle position sensor
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Replace the ignitor
unit.
15 Throttle position sensor
16 Ignitor unit
7-49
Replace the throttle
position sensor.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
ELEC
2. Speed sensor
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Set the main switch to “ON”.
Turn the rear wheel slowly.
Check the tester voltage (0V - 5V - 0V).
Is the speed sensor OK?
YES
Replace the ignitor
unit.
16 Ignitor unit
19 Speed sensor
1. Wire harness
Check the wire harness for continuity.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
Is the wire harness OK?
YES
NO
Repair or replace the
wire harness.
2. Speed sensor
Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand so
that the rear wheel is elevated.
Connect the pocket tester (DC 20V) to the
speed sensor connector.
Tester (+) lead White 1 terminal
Tester (–) lead Body earth
7-50
NO
Replace the speed
sensor.
TRBL
SHTG
8
TRBL
SHTG
CHAPTER 8.
TROUBLESHOOTING
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPRESSION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-2
POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARD SHIFTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JUMPS-OUT-OF GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
CLUTCH SLIPPING/DRAGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
CLUTCH SLIPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
CLUTCH DRAGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
OVERHEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
OVERHEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
FAULTY BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
FRONT FORK OIL LEAKAGE AND FRONT FORK MALFUNCTION . 8-4
MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
OIL LEAKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
UNSTABLE HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
UNSTABLE HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
FAULTY LIGHTING AND SIGNAL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEADLIGHT DOES NOT LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BULB BURNT OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASHER DOES NOT LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASHER BLINKS SLOWLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASHER REMAINS LIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLASHER BLILNKS QUICKLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORN DOES NOT SOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
8-5
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING
TRBL
SHTG
EB900000
TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE:
The following guide for troubleshooting does not cover all the possible causes of problems.
It should be helpful, however, as a guide to troubleshooting. Refer to the relative procedure in this
manual for inspection, adjustment and replacement of parts.
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel tank
Empty
Clogged fuel filter
Clogged fuel strainer
Clogged fuel tank drain hose
Clogged roll-over valve
Clogged roll-over valve breather hose
Deteriorated or contaminated fuel
Fuel cock
Clogged fuel hose
Carburetor
Deteriorated or contaminated fuel
Clogged pilot jet
Clogged pilot air passage
Sucked-in air
Deformed float
Worn needle valve
Improperly sealed valve seat
Improperly adjusted fuel level
Improperly set pilot jet
Clogged starter jet
Faulty starter plunger
Improperly adjusted starter cable
Air filter
Clogged air filter element
Fuel pump
Faulty fuel pump
Faulty relay unit (fuel pump relay)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Spark plug
Improper plug gap
Worn electrodes
Wire between terminals severed
Improper heat range
Faulty spark plug cap
Ignition coil
Broken or shorted primary/secondary
Faulty spark plug lead
Broken body
Full-transistor system
Faulty ignitor unit
Faulty pickup coil
Switch and wiring
Faulty main switch
Faulty engine stop switch
Broken or shorted wiring
Faulty neutral switch
Faulty start switch
Faulty sidestand switch
Faulty clutch switch
Starter motor
Faulty starter motor
Faulty starter relay
Faulty relay unit (starting circuit cut-off relay)
Faulty starter clutch
8-1
STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING/POOR IDLE SPEED
PERFORMANCE/POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE
COMPRESSION SYSTEM
Cylinder and cylinder head
Loose spark plug
Loose cylinder head or cylinder
Faulty cylinder head gasket
Worn, damaged or seized cylinder
Improperly sealed valve
Improper valve-to-valve seat contact
Improper valve timing
Faulty valve spring
TRBL
SHTG
Piston and piston ring
Improperly installed piston ring
Worn, fatigued or broken piston ring
Seized piston ring
Seized or damaged piston
Crankcase and crankshaft
Improperly seated crankcase
Seized crankshaft
EB901000
POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE
POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE
Carburetor
Improperly returned starter plunger
Loose pilot jet
Clogged pilot air jet
Improperly synchronized carburetors
Improperly adjusted idle speed
(throttle stop screw)
Improper throttle cable free play
Flooded carburetor
Electrical system
Faulty battery
Faulty spark plug
Faulty ignitor unit
Faulty pickup coil
Faulty ignition coil
Valve train
Improperly adjusted valve clearance
Air filter
Clogged air filter element
EB902000
POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE
POOR MEDIUM-AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE
Refer to “STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING”. (Fuel system, electrical system, compression
system and valve train)
Air filter
Clogged air filter element
Fuel pump
Faulty fuel pump
Carburetor
Faulty diaphragm
Improperly adjusted fuel level
Clogged or loose main jet
8-2
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING/
CLUTCH SLIPPING/DRAGGING
TRBL
SHTG
EB903000
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING
HARD SHIFTING
Refer to “CLUTCH DRAGGING”.
SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE
Shift shaft
Improperly adjusted shift pedal link
Bent shift shaft
Shift cam, shift fork
Groove jammed with impurities
Seized shift fork
Bent shift fork guide bar
Transmission
Seized transmission gear
Jammed impurities
Incorrectly assembled transmission
JUMPS-OUT-OF GEAR
Shift shaft
Improperly adjusted shift lever position
Improperly returned stopper lever
Shift fork
Worn shift fork
Shift cam
Improper thrust play
Worn shift cam groove
Transmission
Worn gear dog
EB904000
CLUTCH SLIPPING/DRAGGING
CLUTCH SLIPPING
Clutch
Improperly adjusted clutch cable
Loose clutch spring
Fatigued clutch spring
Worn friction plate/clutch plate
Incorrectly assembled clutch
Engine oil
Improper oil level
Improper viscosity (low)
Deterioration
CLUTCH DRAGGING
Clutch
Warped pressure plate
Unevenly tensioned clutch springs
Bent push rod
Broken clutch boss
Burnt primary driven gear bushing
Bent clutch plate
Swollen friction plate
Match marks not aligned
Engine oil
Improper oil level
Improper viscosity (high)
Deterioration
8-3
OVERHEATING/FAULTY BRAKE/FRONT FORK OIL
LEAKAGE AND FRONT FORK MALFUNCTION
TRBL
SHTG
EB905000
OVERHEATING
OVERHEATING
Ignition system
Improper spark plug gap
Improper spark plug heat range
Faulty ignitor unit
Fuel system
Improper carburetor main jet setting
Improper fuel level
Clogged air filter element
Compression system
Heavy carbon build-up
Engine oil
Improper oil level
Improper oil viscosity
Inferior oil quality
Brake
Brake drag
EB906001
FAULTY BRAKE
POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE
Disc brake
Worn brake pad
Worn disc
Air in brake fluid
Leaking brake fluid
Faulty cylinder kit cup
Faulty caliper kit seal
Loose union bolt
Broken brake hose
Oily or greasy disc/brake pad
Incorrect brake fluid level
EB907000
FRONT FORK OIL LEAKAGE AND FRONT FORK MALFUNCTION
OIL LEAKAGE
Bent, damaged or rusty inner tube
Damaged or cracked outer tube
Damaged oil seal lip
Improperly installed oil seal
Improper oil level (too high)
Loose damper rod holding bolt
Broken cap bolt O-ring
Loose drain bolt
Damaged drain bolt gasket
MALFUNCTION
Bent, deformed or damaged inner tube
Bent or deformed outer tube
Damaged fork spring
Worn or damaged slide metal
Bent or damaged damper rod
Improper oil viscosity
Improper oil level
8-4
UNSTABLE HANDLING/
FAULTY LIGHTING AND SIGNAL SYSTEMS
TRBL
SHTG
EB908000
UNSTABLE HANDLING
UNSTABLE HANDLING
Handlebar
Improperly installed or bent
Steering
Improperly installed handlebar crown
Bent steering stem
Improperly installed steering shaft
(improperly tightened ring nut)
Damaged ball bearing or bearing race
Front fork
Uneven oil levels on both sides
Uneven spring tension
(uneven damping force adjuster position)
Broken spring
Twisted front fork
Swingarm
Worn bearing or bushing
Bent or damaged
Rear Shock absorber
Faulty spring
Oil and gas leakage
Tire
Uneven tire pressures on both sides
Incorrect tire pressure
Uneven tire wear
Wheel
Incorrect wheel balance
Deformed cast wheel
Damaged bearing
Bent or loose wheel axle
Excessive wheel runout
Loosed spoke
Frame
Bent
Damaged steering head tube
Improperly installed bearing race
EB909000
FAULTY LIGHTING AND SIGNAL SYSTEMS
HEADLIGHT DOES NOT LIGHT
Improper bulb
Too many electric accessories
Hard charging (broken stator coil wire, faulty
rectifier/regulator)
Incorrect connection
Improperly grounded
Poor contacts (main or lights switch)
Bulb life expired
BULB BURNT OUT
Improper bulb
Faulty battery
Faulty rectifier/regulator
Improperly grounded
Faulty main and/or lights switch
Bulb life expired
FLASHER DOES NOT LIGHT
Improperly grounded
Discharged battery
Faulty turn switch
Faulty flasher relay
Faulty wire harness
Loosely connected coupler
Burnt-out bulb
Faulty fuse
FLASHER BLINKS SLOWLY
Faulty flasher relay
Faulty main and/or turn switch
Improper bulb
FLASHER REMAINS LIT
Faulty flasher relay
Burnt-out bulb
FLASHER BLINKS QUICKLY
Improper bulb
Faulty flasher relay
Burnt-out bulb
HORN DOES NOT SOUND
Faulty battery
Faulty fuse
Faulty main and/or horn switch
Improperly adjusted horn
Faulty horn
Broken wire harness
8-5
XVS1100 WIRING DIAGRAM (for Europe)
COLOR CODE
B .....
Br . . . .
Ch . . .
Dg . . .
G ....
Gy . . .
Black
Brown
Chocolate
Dark green
Green
Gray
L .....
Lg . . . .
O ....
P .....
R.....
Sb . . . .
Blue
Light green
Orange
Pink
Red
Sky blue
W ....
Y .....
B/ L . . .
B/ W . .
B/ Y . . .
Br/ B . .
White
Yellow
Black/ Blue
Black/ White
Black/ Yellow
Brown/ Black
Br/ L . .
Br/ W .
Br/ Y . .
L/B . . .
L/R . . .
L/W . .
Brown/ Blue
Brown/ White
Brown/ Yellow
Blue/ Black
Blue/ Red
Blue/ White
L/Y . . .
R/ B . . .
R/ G . .
R/ W . .
R/ Y . . .
Blue/ Yellow
Red/ Black
Red/ Green
Red/ White
Red/ Yellow
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Pickup coil
A.C. magneto
Rectifier/ regulator
Main switch
Alarm system (Option)
Ignition fuse
Battery
Main fuse
Starter relay
Starter motor
Oil level gauge
Oil lamp relay
Starting circuit cut-off relay
Fuel pump
Throttle position sensor
Igniter unit
Ignition coil
Spark plug
Speed sensor
Neutral switch
Engine warning light
Oil warning light
Speedometer
Turn signal indicator light
Meter light
Neutral indicator light
High beam indicator light
Trip switch
Sidestand switch
Flasher relay
Turn signal switch
Rear turn signal light (right)
Rear turn signal light (left)
Front turn signal light (right)
Front turn signal light (left)
Clutch switch
Start switch
Engine stop switch
Light switch
Front brake switch
Right handlebar switch
Horn
Horn switch
Dimmer switch
Rear brake switch
Pass switch
Left handlebar switch
Headlight
Auxiliary light
Tail/ brake light
Backup fuse
Headlight fuse
Signal fuse
Carburetor heater fuse
Thermo switch
Carburetor heater relay
Carburetor heater 1
Carburetor heater 2
Carburetor heater earth
Diode
XVS1100L WIRING DIAGRAM (for AUS)
COLOR CODE
B .....
Br . . . .
Ch . . .
Dg . . .
G ....
Gy . . .
Black
Brown
Chocolate
Dark green
Green
Gray
L .....
Lg . . . .
O ....
P .....
R.....
Sb . . . .
Blue
Light green
Orange
Pink
Red
Sky blue
W ....
Y .....
B/ L . . .
B/ W . .
B/ Y . . .
Br/ B . .
White
Yellow
Black/ Blue
Black/ White
Black/ Yellow
Brown/ Black
Br/ L . .
Br/ W .
Br/ Y . .
L/B . . .
L/R . . .
L/W . .
Brown/ Blue
Brown/ White
Brown/ Yellow
Blue/ Black
Blue/ Red
Blue/ White
L/Y . . .
R/ B . . .
R/ G . .
R/ W . .
R/ Y . . .
Blue/ Yellow
Red/ Black
Red/ Green
Red/ White
Red/ Yellow
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Pickup coil
A.C. magneto
Rectifier/ regulator
Main switch
Ignition fuse
Battery
Main fuse
Starter relay
Starter motor
Oil level gauge
Oil lamp relay
Starting circuit cut-off relay
Fuel pump
Throttle position sensor
Igniter unit
Ignition coil
Spark plug
Speed sensor
Neutral switch
Engine warning light
Oil warning light
Speedometer
Turn signal indicator light
Meter light
Neutral indicator light
High beam indicator light
Trip switch
Sidestand switch
Flasher relay
Turn signal switch
Rear turn signal light (right)
Rear turn signal light (left)
Front turn signal light (right)
Front turn signal light (left)
Clutch switch
Start switch
Engine stop switch
Front brake switch
Right handlebar switch
Horn
Horn switch
Dimmer switch
Rear brake switch
Pass switch
Left handlebar switch
Headlight
Tail/ brake light
Backup fuse
Headlight fuse
Signal fuse
Carburetor heater fuse
Thermo switch
Carburetor heater relay
Carburetor heater 1
Carburetor heater 2
Carburetor heater earth
Diode
CABLE ROUTING
A Clamp the throttle cables with E Position the steel band end to
the holder. Position the end of
right side.
clip downword.
F Route the battery positive (+)
B Route the rear brake switch lead
lead through the slit of the batunder the master cylinder resertery box.
vor hose.
G Clamp the igniter unit lead to the
C Position the band end of right
frame with a holder.
side bracket.
H To the rear fender.
D Position the steel band end to
forward.
–13–
SPEC
I Connect the wireharness to the
ignitar unit through the hole of
LID. 2.
J Route the fuel tank breather
hose under the fuel filter and
connect it (fuel tank sideroll over
valve side) with a joint. Position
the end of clip outside.